Menu

Matthew 4:24 — Word Study

Depth

N1904Καὶ ἀπῆλθεν ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν Συρίαν· καὶ προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας, ποικίλαις νόσοις καὶ βασάνοις συνεχομένους, καὶ δαιμονιζομένους καὶ σεληνιαζομένους καὶ παραλυτικούς· καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτούς.

BSAAndkai went outaperchomai theho newsakoē of Himautos [his fame, reputation] intoeis allholos <the>ho Syria;Suria [the region, province] Andkai they broughtprospherō to Himautos allpas theho sickkakōs [sick, afflicted] havingechō variouspoikilos [divers, different] diseasesnosos [sicknesses, maladies] andkai by painsbasanos [severe anguish] oppressing,sunechō [tormented, troubled] andkai those being demoniseddaimonizomai [under evil spirits' control] andkai those being epilepticselēniazomai [experiencing, epileptic fits] andkai those paralytic;paralutikos [unable to move, lame] andkai He healedtherapeuō [cured, restored to health] them.autos

Word
Listen & take awayMatthew 4
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 24 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (autos) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Matthew 4:24quick helps
In a sentenceNews about Jesus spread widely, leading many to bring their sick and afflicted to Him for healing.
Who is speakingThe narrator describes the impact of Jesus' ministry and the response of the people.
Where we areThis verse is part of the account of Jesus' early ministry in Galilee.
The hard wordἀκοὴ
Take awayJesus' healing power attracted great attention and drew people from afar.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subject verbἀπέρχομαι The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Matthew 4:24

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The Healing Ministry of Jesusgenerated

22and immediately they left the boat and their father and followed Him.
23Jesus went throughout Galilee, teaching in their synagogues, preaching the gospel of the kingdom, and healing every disease and sickness among the people.
24News about Him spread all over Syria, and people brought to Him all who were ill with various diseases, those suffering acute pain, the demon-possessed, those having seizures, and the paralyzed—and He healed them.
25The large crowds that followed Him came from Galilee, the Decapolis, Jerusalem, Judea, and beyond the Jordan.

Matthew 4:24 illustrates the widespread impact of Jesus' ministry as news about Him traveled throughout Syria. People brought to Him all who were suffering from various illnesses, including those in severe pain, the demon-possessed, and others with debilitating conditions. This reflects the compassion of Jesus and His authority to heal, drawing crowds from diverse regions, as noted in the surrounding verses.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Matthew 9:26–31And the news about this spread throughout that region.
2Matthew 14:1At that time Herod the tetrarch heard the reports about Jesus
3Joshua 6:27So the LORD was with Joshua, and his fame spread throughout the land.
41 Kings 4:31He was wiser than all men—wiser than Ethan the Ezrahite, and wiser than Heman, Calcol, and Darda, the sons of Mahol. And his fame spread throughout the surrounding nations.
51 Kings 10:1Now when the queen of Sheba heard about the fame of Solomon concerning the name of the LORD, she came to test him with difficult questions.

The Key Word ἀκοὴ, akoēgenerated

The Greek word ἀκοὴ (akoē) means 'hearing' and can refer to both the act of hearing and the news or report that is heard. It is a feminine noun in the nominative case, indicating it is the subject of the sentence. The use of this term emphasizes the spread of information about Jesus and His miraculous works.

In this context, ἀκοὴ signifies the fame of Jesus that prompted people to seek Him out for healing. The word captures the essence of how His reputation grew as people shared their experiences and testimonies of His miraculous healings.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The translations generally agree on the meaning of the verse, with slight variations in wording. The Berean Standard Bible uses news, while the American Standard Version opts for report to convey the same idea.

Additionally, the King James Version employs fame, which aligns with the idea of news spreading about Jesus' miraculous works. The differences reflect the translators' choices in conveying the same underlying concept.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb in the verse is ἀπῆλθεν, went out, which governs the entire sentence. It is supported by a noun phrase indicating the subject, 'news about Him,' and several clauses detailing what people did in response to this news.

The structure includes multiple noun phrases that describe the various groups of people brought to Jesus for healing, such as those suffering from diseases, pains, and demonic possession. This highlights the diverse needs of those seeking His help.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

The term νόσος appears in the Septuagint, where it translates the Hebrew word for 'sickness' or 'disease.' It emphasizes the continuity of the concept of illness from the Old Testament to the New Testament, where Jesus addresses these afflictions.

The LXX context enriches our understanding of how Jesus' healing ministry fulfills the expectations set in the Hebrew Scriptures regarding the healing of the sick.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Matthew 4:24 shows that news about Jesus spread throughout Syria, prompting many people to bring their sick and afflicted to Him. He healed those suffering from various diseases, those in pain, the demon-possessed, and others who were paralyzed. This demonstrates Jesus' compassion and authority over illness.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does it mean that news about Him spread?

It signifies that Jesus' reputation grew due to His miraculous works, leading many to seek Him for healing.

Who were the people brought to Jesus?

They included those suffering from various diseases, acute pain, demonic possession, seizures, and paralysis.

What does the term 'demon-possessed' imply?

It indicates individuals believed to be under the control of evil spirits, suffering from severe afflictions.

How did Jesus respond to the needs of the people?

He healed them, demonstrating His compassion and divine authority over sickness and suffering.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. How can I share the news of Jesus' healing power with others?
  2. What are some ways I can support those who are suffering in my community?
  3. In what areas of my life do I need healing or restoration?
  4. How does understanding Jesus' compassion for the sick affect my view of Him?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early church writers reflect on this verse, discussing the nature of the afflictions Jesus healed and the significance of His ministry.

Origen of AlexandriaFRAGMENT 77.11 c. 185–253
You will see the variety of evils in prodigality or avarice, boorishness or licentiousness, in silliness, knavery, insolence, cowardice and every opposing vice; and the soul’s trials are money, fame, poverty, obscurity.
Early Church Fathers on Matthew 4 →
JeromeVerse 24 c. 347–420
And he healed the lunatics and the paralytics. And many crowds followed him from Galilee and Decapolis, and from Jerusalem, and from Judea, and from beyond the Jordan.
Early Church Fathers on Matthew 4 →
Augustine of HippoDe Civ. Dei, xxi. 6. 354–430
Daemons are enticed to take up their abode in many creatures, (created not by themselves but God,) by delights adapted to their various natures; not that they are animals, drawn by meats;
Early Church Fathers on Matthew 4 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Matthew 4:24 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

And his fame went throughout all Syria,.... For his ministry and miracles, especially the latter; wherefore they brought to him, that is, out of Syria, the sick.

Read John Gill on Matthew 4 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And his fame went throughout all Syria: and they brought unto him all sick people that were taken with divers diseases and torments, and those which were possessed with devils, and those which were

Read Robert Jamieson on Matthew 4 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

Syria is said to be bounded on the north by Cilicia, by Egypt on the south, on the west with the sea, and on the east with Euphrates, and to comprehend within it all Judea, Bethany, Galilee, Decapolis, Samaria, Idumea, Palestina, Syrophoenicia, Syria of Damascus, and Syria of Antioch. Christ’ s fame spread very far doubtless, because of the good he did, and the miracles he wrought, and they brought unto him all sick people that were taken with divers diseases: ‘ all’ here again can signify no more than very many that were indisposed and ill affected as to their bodily health, those that were sick of, or detained in their beds or houses by, divers diseases. Though Christ showed his power in…

Read Matthew Poole on Matthew 4 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

24 And his fame went throughout all Syria: and they brought unto him all sick people that were taken with divers diseases and torments, and those which were possessed with devils, and those which were lunatick, and those that had the palsy; and he healed them. Ver. 24. And his fame went through all Syria] Fame followeth desert, as a sweet scent the rose. This gave occasion to the poets to feign that Achilles’ tomb was ever garnished with green amaranth. "A good name is better than great riches," saith Solomon, Proverbs 22:1. And if I can keep my credit, I am rich enough, saith the heathen. ( Ego si bonam famam servasso, sat dives ero. Plaut.) Blessing and good report are expressed by one…

Read John Trapp on Matthew 4 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(24) Throughout all Syria.—The word is probably used popularly, rather than with the definite significance of the Roman province with which St. Luke uses it in Luke 2:2. Our Lord’s ministry, with the one exception of the journey to the coasts of Tyre and Sidon (Matthew 15:21), was confined to what is commonly known as Palestine. Traces of the wider fame are, however, found in the mention of hearers from Idumæa, and Tyre, and Sidon among the crowds that followed Him (Mark 3:8); in the faith of the Syro-Phœnician woman in His power to heal (Mark 7:26); perhaps in the existence of disciples at Damascus so soon after the Ascension (Acts 9:2); perhaps, also, in St. Peter’s appeal to the friends…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Matthew 4 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 24. Sick people] Τους, κακωςεχοντας, those who felt ill - were afflicted with any species of malady. And torments] βασανοις, from βασανιζω, to examine by torture, such as cholics, gouts, and rheumatisms, which racked every joint. Possessed with devils] Daemoniacs. Persons possessed by evil spirits. This is certainly the plain obvious meaning of daemoniac in the Gospels. Many eminent men think that the sacred writers accommodated themselves to the unfounded prejudices of the common people, in attributing certain diseases to the influence of evil spirits, which were merely the effects of natural causes: but that this explanation can never comport with the accounts given of these persons…

Read AdamClarke on Matthew 4 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

24. throughout all Syria] The fame passes to the north and east, rather than to the south. Galilee is connected by trade and affinity with Damascus rather than with Jerusalem. torments] The original Greek word signifies a “touch-stone,” then “torture,” the touch-stone of justice; then a disease that racks and agonizes the limbs like the torture which many a poor Galilean had experienced in the courts of law. possessed with devils] The possession of the human soul by spiritual powers or beings is distinguished from ordinary diseases here, and also by St Luke, who, as a physician, is exact in his description of the various forms of disease. The distinguishing feature of such demoniacal…

Read Cambridge on Matthew 4 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

And his fame went throughout all Syria - It is not easy to fix the exact bounds of Syria in the time of our Saviour.

Read Albert Barnes on Matthew 4 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

News about Him spread all over Syria, and people brought to Him all who were ill with various diseases, those suffering acute pain, the demon-possessed, those having seizures, and the paralyzed—and He healed them.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

The report about him went out into all Syria. They brought to him all who were sick, afflicted with various diseases and torments, possessed with demons, epileptics, and paralytics; and he healed them.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

News about Him spread all over Syria, and people brought to Him all who were ill with various diseases, those suffering acute pain, the demon-possessed, those having seizures, and the paralyzed, and He healed them.

NETBNew English Translation2006

So a report about him spread throughout Syria. People brought to him all who suffered with various illnesses and afflictions, those who had seizures, paralytics, and those possessed by demons, and he healed them.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

And his fame went throughout all Syria: and they brought unto him all sick people that were taken with divers diseases and torments, and those which were possessed with devils, and those which were lunatick, and those that had the palsy; and he healed them.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

And the report of him went forth into all Syria: and they brought unto him all that were sick, holden with divers diseases and torments, possessed with demons, and epileptic, and palsied; and he healed them.

RVARevised Version, American1894

And the report of him went forth into all Syria: and they brought unto him all that were sick, holden with divers diseases and torments, possessed with devils, and epileptic, and palsied; and he healed them.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

And his fame spread throughout all Syria: and they brought to him all sick people that were taken with diverse diseases and torments, and those who were possessed with demons, and those who were lunatic, and those that had the palsy; and he healed them.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

And his fame spread abroad through all Syria: and they brought vnto him all sicke people, that were taken with diuers diseases and torments, and them that were possessed with deuils, and those which were lunatike, and those that had the palsey: and he healed them.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

And his fame went out into the whole [of] Syria, and they brought to him all that were ill, suffering under various diseases and pains, and those possessed by demons, and lunatics, and paralytics; and he healed them.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

and his fame went forth to all Syria, and they brought to him all having ailments, pressed with manifold sicknesses and pains, and demoniacs, and lunatics, and paralytics, and he healed them.

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

and His fame went forth to all Syria, and they brought to Him all the ill having manifold oppressing diseases and torments—and demoniacs, and lunatics, and paralytics—and He healed them.

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

The news about him went out into all of Syria, and the people brought to him all those who were sick, ill with various diseases and pains, those possessed by demons, and the epileptic and paralytic. Jesus healed them.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And his fame went throughout all Syria, and they presented to him all sick people that were taken with divers diseases and torments, and such as were possessed by devils, and lunatics, and those that had palsy, and he cured them:

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

News about him spread throughout the province of Syria. They brought everyone who was sick to him: people troubled by seizures, the demon-possessed, those who were mentally ill, people who were paralyzed, and he healed all of them.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

And news of him went out through all Syria; and they took to him all who were ill with different diseases and pains, those having evil spirits and those who were off their heads, and those who had no power of moving. And he made them well.

Word by word, the decisions they made

ἀπῆλθενaperchomai went out G565 2 different renderings
wentASV DRA KJV LSV RVA YLT
went outBBE DBY ULB WEB
ἀκοὴakoē news G189 2 different renderings
newsBBE BSB FBV MSB ULB
reportASV NETB RVA WEB
ὅληνholos all G3650 2 different renderings
allASV BBE BSB DRA FBV GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
wholeDBY
Συρίαν·Suria Syria; G4947 2 different renderings
syriaASV BBE BSB DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
provinceFBV
προσήνεγκανprospherō they brought G4374 2 different renderings
they broughtASV DBY FBV GNV KJV LSV NWB RVA WEB YLT
broughtBSB MSB NETB ULB
πάνταςpas all G3956 2 different renderings
allASV BBE BSB DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
everyoneFBV

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseκαὶAndclauseverbἀπῆλθενwent outnoun phrase · subjectthenoun phraseἀκοὴnewsαὐτοῦof Himprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςintonoun phraseὅληνallnoun phraseτὴν-ΣυρίανSyriaclauseκαὶAndclauseclauseverbπροσήνεγκανthey broughtindirect objectαὐτῷto Himnoun phrase · objectnoun phraseπάνταςallnoun phraseτοὺςtheclauseadverbialκακῶςsickverbἔχονταςhavingnoun phrasenoun phraseclausenoun phrase · adverbialποικίλαιςvariousnoun phraseνόσοιςdiseasesκαὶandβασάνοιςpainsverbσυνεχομένουςoppressingδαιμονιζομένουςbeing possessed by demonsκαὶandσεληνιαζομένουςbeing epilepticsκαὶandπαραλυτικούςparalyticsκαὶandclauseverbἐθεράπευσενHe healedobjectαὐτούςthem

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Et abiit opinio ejus in totam Syriam, et obtulerunt ei omnes male habentes, variis languoribus, et tormentis comprehensos, et qui dæmonia habebant, et lunaticos, et paralyticos, et curavit eos :

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܐܫܬܡܥ ܛܒܗ ܒܟܠܗ ܣܘܪܝܐ ܘܩܪܒܘ ܠܗ ܟܠܗܘܢ ܐܝܠܝܢ ܕܒܝܫ ܒܝܫ ܥܒܝܕܝܢ ܒܟܘܪܗܢܐ ܡܫܚܠܦܐ ܘܐܝܠܝܢ ܕܐܠܝܨܝܢ ܒܬܫܢܝܩܐ ܘܕܝܘܢܐ ܘܕܒܪ ܐܓܪܐ ܘܡܫܪܝܐ ܘܐܣܝ ܐܢܘܢ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Καὶ ἀπῆλθεν ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν Συρίαν· καὶ προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας, ποικίλαις νόσοις καὶ βασάνοις συνεχομένους, καὶ δαιμονιζομένους καὶ σεληνιαζομένους καὶ παραλυτικούς· καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτούς.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Καὶ ἀπῆλθεν ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν Συρίαν· καὶ προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας, ποικίλαις νόσοις καὶ βασάνοις συνεχομένους, καὶ δαιμονιζομένους καὶ σεληνιαζομένους καὶ παραλυτικούς· καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτούς.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

Καὶ ἀπῆλθεν ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν Συρίαν· καὶ προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας, ποικίλαις νόσοις καὶ βασάνοις συνεχομένους, δαιμονιζομένους καὶ σεληνιαζομένους καὶ παραλυτικούς· καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτούς.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

Καὶ ἀπῆλθεν ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν Συρίαν· καὶ προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας, ποικίλαις νόσοις καὶ βασάνοις συνεχομένους, δαιμονιζομένους καὶ σεληνιαζομένους καὶ παραλυτικούς· καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτούς.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

Καὶ ἀπῆλθεν ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν Συρίαν· καὶ προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας, ποικίλαις νόσοις καὶ βασάνοις συνεχομένους, δαιμονιζομένους καὶ σεληνιαζομένους καὶ παραλυτικούς· καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτούς.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

Καὶ ἀπῆλθεν ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν Συρίαν· καὶ προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας, ποικίλαις νόσοις καὶ βασάνοις συνεχομένους, δαιμονιζομένους καὶ σεληνιαζομένους καὶ παραλυτικούς· καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτούς.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

Καὶ ἀπῆλθεν ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν Συρίαν· καὶ προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας, ποικίλαις νόσοις καὶ βασάνοις συνεχομένους, καὶ δαιμονιζομένους καὶ σεληνιαζομένους καὶ παραλυτικούς· καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτούς.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

Καὶ ἀπῆλθεν ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν Συρίαν· καὶ προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας, ποικίλαις νόσοις καὶ βασάνοις συνεχομένους, καὶ δαιμονιζομένους καὶ σεληνιαζομένους καὶ παραλυτικούς· καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτούς.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
καὶ andNA28, NA27, TR, ByzSBL, WH, Treg, Tyn

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Matthew 4:24καίAndAndκαίἀπέρχομαιwent outwent outἀπέρχομαιthetheἀκοήnewsnewsἀκοήαὐτόςof Himof Himαὐτόςεἰςintointoεἰςὅλοςallallὅλος<the><the>ΣυρίαSyria;Syria;ΣυρίακαίAndAndκαίπροσφέρωthey broughthey broughtπροσφέρωαὐτόςto Himto Himαὐτόςπᾶςallallπᾶςthetheκακῶςsicksickκακῶςἔχωhavinghavingἔχωποικίλοςvariousvariousποικίλοςνόσοςdiseasesdiseasesνόσοςκαίandandκαίβάσανοςby painsby painsβάσανοςσυνέχωoppressing,oppressing,συνέχωκαίandandκαίδαιμονίζομαιthose beingthose being demδαιμονίζομαικαίandandκαίσεληνιάζομαιthose beingthose being epiσεληνιάζομαικαίandandκαίπαραλυτικόςthose paralthose paralyticπαραλυτικόςκαίandandκαίθεραπεύωHe healedHe healedθεραπεύωαὐτόςthem.them.αὐτόςἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦἀπόPrep. fromPrep. from, awaἀπόἀκούωv. I hear,v. I hear, listἀκούωπρόςPrep. to, Prep. to, towarπρόςκακόςAdj bad, eAdj bad, evilκακόςσύνPrep. withPrep. withσύνδαίμωνn.m. an evn.m. an evil-spδαίμωνβάσιςn.f. the fn.f. the footβάσιςσελήνηn.f. the mn.f. the moonσελήνηπαραλύωv. I relaxv. I relax, enfπαραλύωθεράπωνn.m. a sern.m. a servant,θεράπωνἐπερωτάωv. I interv. I interrogatἐπερωτάωποικίλοςAdj variouAdj various, ofποικίλοςκακῶςAdv badly,Adv badly, evilκακῶςνόσοςn.f. a disn.f. a disease,νόσοςπέρανAdv over, Adv over, beyonπέρανὀπίσωAdv behindAdv behind, aftὀπίσω
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Matthew 4:24

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
Καὶkai And G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίAnd8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
ἀπῆλθενaperchomai went out G565 Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
117× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to go away or depart from a place or person, as seen in Matthew 13:25. It can also mean to follow or go behind someone, and is often used in the Gospels to describe Jesus' travels. The word is used in various contexts, including Jesus' parables.
Tyndale gloss
to go away
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀπέρχομαι (i.e., *aperchomai*) means to go away or depart, and can imply both leaving a place and arriving at another. It is used in various contexts, including literal departures and metaphorical senses, such as following someone. Notably, some lexicographers disagree on whether it can mean to return, with Thayer suggesting it does not inherently carry that meaning.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπ-έρχομαι,

[in LXX chiefly for הלךְ;]

to go away, depart (also, in late writers, with "perfective" force, to arrive at a destination, the thought being carried on to the goal; M, Pr., 111 f., 247; MM, s.v.);

absol.: Mt 13:25, al.; ptcp., ἀπελθών, used pleonastically with other verbs as in Heb. (Dalman, Words, 21), Mt 13:28, al.;

with mention of place or person: εἰς, Mt 14:15; ἐπί, Lk 24:24; πρός, Re 10:9; ἀπό, Lk 1:38; ἐξω, Ac 4:15; ἐκεῖ, Mt…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀπ-έρχομαι ; fut. ἀπελεύσομαι (Mt. xxv. 46; Ro. xv. 28; W. 86 (82)); 2 aor. ἀπῆλθον (ἀπῆλθα in Rev. x. 9 [where RG Tr -θον], ἀπῆλθαν LT Tr WH in Mt. xxii. 22; Rev. xxi. 1, 4 [(but here WH txt. only), ete., and WH in Lk. xxiv. 24]; cf. W. § 13,1; Mullach p. 17 sq. [226]; B. 39 (34); [.Soph. Lex. p. 38; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 164 sq.; Kuenen and Cobet, N. T. p. lxiv.; Scrivener, Introd. p. 562; Collation, ete., p. liv. sq.]); pf. ἀπελήλυθα (Jas. i. 24); plpf. ἀπεληλύθειν (In. iv. 8) ; [fr. Hom. down]; to go away (fr. a place), to depart; 1. properly, a. absol.: Mt. xiii. 25; xix. 22; Mk. v. 20; Lk. viii. 39; xvii. 23; Jn. xvi. 7, ete. Ptep. ἀπελθών with indic. or subj. of other verbs in past time to go (away) and ete.: Mt. xiii. 28,46; xviii. 30; xxv. 18, 25; xxvi. 36; xxvii. 5; Mk. vi. 27 (28), 37; Lk. v.14. Ὁ. with specification of the place into which, or of the person to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀπέρχομαι occurs in a special sense in the affectionate letter of Philonides to his father the “‘ architect’ Cleon, P Petr II. 13 (19)? (middle of iii/B.c.) (=Witkowski?, p. 19), ζῶντός σου καὶ εἰς θεοὺς ἀπελθόντος. So, much later, in the beautiful simplicity of a Christian epitaph, Preisigke 1190: Tahoat ἐβίωσεν Parr I, qa ἀπέχω εἴκουσι ὀκτώ, γ(ίνονται) (ἔτη) KH His λαμπρὰν (sc. γῆν) ἀπῆλθεν ---ἃ striking contrast to the monotonous ἄωρε χαῖρε on the pagan tombs of the young. of the word, it is sufficient to cite P Par 32°* (B.c. 162) γινώσκετε, ἀφ᾽ οὗ ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν ἀπελήλυθα, μὴ ἐσχολα[κέν]αι For the ordinary use A.D.) πρὶν οὖν ἀπέλθῃς πρὸς Χαιρήμονα, ἀνά(βαινεὶ πρός pe, ἵνα σοι ἀποτάξομαι. It inay be noted that “‘in later times the idea of the word goes forward to the goal” (Usener, Pe/agiaLegenden, p. 49). So in Pelagia, p. 75) ἀπήλθαμεν ἐν τῇ μεγάλῃ ἐκκλησίᾳ, “ we arrived at the great…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀπέρχομαι (aperchomai) — to go away.

ἀπέρχομαι,

future -ελεύσομαι (Attic dialect future ἄπειμι): perfect -ελήλυθα: aorist -ῆλθον:— go away, depart from, with genitive, πάτρης[Refs 8th c.BC+] cease from tears. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. with εἰς, implying departure from one place and arrival at another, ἀ. ἐς τὰς Σάρδις[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. ἐπ᾽ οἴκου depart homewards, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀπῆλθεν ὅθεν.. went back to the place whence he came, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. absolutely, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ταχεῖ᾽ ἀπέρχεται (i.e. ἡ νόσος) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κᾷτ᾽ ὀφλὼν ἀ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἄπελθε τουτονὶ λαβών take him and be off! [Refs 5th c.BC+]

4. with participle, ἀ. νικῶν come off conqueror, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀπέρχομαι

aperchomai

from 575 and 2064; to go off (i.e. depart), aside (i.e. apart) or

behind (i.e. follow), literally or figuratively:--come, depart, go

(aside, away, back, out, ... ways), pass away, be past.

see GREEK for 575

see GREEK for 2064

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀπέρχομαι

v.

I come or go away from, depart, return

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀπέρχομαι aperchomai 117x

to go away, depart, Mt. 8:18; to go forth, pervade, as a rumor, Mt. 4:24; to arrive at a destination, Lk. 23:33; to pass away, disappear, Rev. 21:4; ἀπέρχομαι ὀπίσω, to follow, Mk. 1:20

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀπέρχομαι to go away, depart from, c. gen., Hom., attic; ἀπό or ἐκ τόπου Thuc.

when used with εἰς, departure from one place and arrival at another is implied, ἀπ. ἐς Σάρδις Hdt., etc.

absol. to depart, id. Hdt., Thuc., etc.: to depart from life, Anth.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAI-3S — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
second aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
11%having gone
having gone11% · 13×having gone away11% · 13×went away10% · 12×they went away7% · 8×he went away7% · 8×he departed7% · 8×departed4% · 5×go3% · 4×other renderings40% · 48×

119 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 44 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb83%adverbial17%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 117 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
γυνήa woman, wife, mφεύγωI flee, escape, σῖτοςwheat, grain
αὐτός
μαθητήςa learner, disciἀφίημιI send away, relκαταλείπωI leave behind,
ἀλλάbut, except
θέλωI will, wish, deλέγωI say, speakἸουδαῖοςJewish
μήNeg
ἔθνοςa race, people, ὧδεhereγάρfor
ἵναin order that, so th
ὄχλοςa crowdἐγώαὐτός
ἀπέρχομαιwent out117×
what comes after →
εἰς
Article theἔρημοςdeserted, desolaἈραβίαArabia
καίand, even, also, nam
θάπτωI buryεἰςπολύςmuch, many, ofte
ἀπό
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
Article the
ἀκοήhearing, facultyἄνθρωποςa man, one of thἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
Article theαὐτόςἑαυτοῦMt 6:34, Lk 12:1

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀπέρχομαι · 117× in the New Testament
Matthew Mark John Luke Revelation Acts Galatians James Jude Romans

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 69 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn Joseph 126c. AD 40

ἦλθον, ἀπῆλθον, ἐφάνησαν, ἀπεπήδησαν, πρὶν καταληφθῆναι βεβαίως ἀπέπτησαν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.115c. AD 75–95

οὐ γὰρ ἦν αὐτοῖς εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπελθεῖν μὴ μετὰ τῶν ἐπαγγελιῶν ἀπερχομένοις, καὶ τοῦ πάθους οὖν χείρονος καθʼ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν γινομένου καὶ τῶν υἱῶν δεομένων οὐκ εἶχεν, ὅ τι χρήσαιτο τοῖς παροῦσιν.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 12.4c. AD 96

ἐπισταθέντων δὲ τῶν παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως καὶ λεγόντων: Πρὸς σὲ εἰσῆλθον οἱ κατάσκοποι τῆς γῆς ἡμῶν: ἐξάγαγε αὐτούς, ὁ γὰρ βασιλεὺς οὕτως κελεύει, ἥδε ἀπεκρίθη: Εἰσῆλθον μὲν οἱ ἄνδρες, οὓς ζητεῖτε, πρός με, ἀλλ̓ εὐθέως ἀπῆλθον καὶ πορεύονται τῇ ὁδῷ:…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59368Memphis (?)242 BC

Ασ· παραγενομένου γὰρ τοῦ πλοίου ἐπὶ τὸν ὅρμον καὶ τῶν παρʼ αὐτοῦ κωλυσάντων κενὸν ἀπῆλθεν. ἀξιοῦμεν οὖν σε, ἐπειδὴ οὐθʼ ἡμῖν ἐκποιεῖ ἀποδημεῖν οὔτʼ ἐκείνωι ἐνθάδε παραγενέσθαι, γράψαι αὐτῶι

P.Fay. 123Euhemeria (Arsinoites)AD 100

σοι. ἐλήλυθεν γὰρ Τεύφιλος Ἰουδαῖος λέγων ὅτι ἤχθην εἰς γεωργίαν καὶ βούλομαι πρὸς Σαβεῖνον ἀπελθεῖν. οὔτε γὰρ εἴρηκε ἡμῖν ἀγόμενος ἵνα ἀπολυθῇ, ἀλλὰ αἰφνιδίως εἴρηκεν ἡμῖν σήμερον. γνώσομαι γὰρ

P.Fay. 116Euhemeria (ArsinoitesAD 104

εἰς τὴν πόλιν καὶ ποίησον … τας καλοὺς τεσσαράκοντα , ἐπεὶ βουλεύομαι εἰς πόλιν ἀπελθεῖν χάριν τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ χάριν ἐκείνου τοῦ μετεώρου ἕως πεντεκαιδεκάτης τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος μηνὸς Χύακ,

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
ho the G3588 Article · nominative · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSF — Article · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
ἀκοὴakoē news G189 Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
24× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Refers to the act of hearing or the sense of hearing, as in 1 Corinthians 12:17 and 2 Peter 2:8. It can also mean a thing heard or a report.
Tyndale gloss
hearing
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀκοή (akoē) means hearing and encompasses the sense of hearing, the organ (ear), and things heard, such as reports or teachings. It appears in various New Testament contexts, including 1 Corinthians 12:17 and John 12:38. The lexicons note its use in both a physical and metaphorical sense, but they do not present significant disagreement regarding its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀκοή, -ῆς, ἡ

(< ἀκούω),

[in LXX: Ex 15:26, al. for שׁמע, its parts and derivatives, exc. De 11:22 (שׁמר);]

hearing, the sense of hearing: I Co 12:17, II Pe 2:8; "Hebraic dative," ἀκοῇ ακούειν (freq. in LXX; V. M, Pr., 14, 75), Mt 13:14, Ac 28:26.

organ of hearing, the ear (Arist., al.; MM, VGT, s.v.): II Ti 4:3, 4; pl., Mk 7:35, Lk 7:1, Ac 17:20, He 5:11.

a thing heard, i.e.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀκοή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. an assumed pf. form ἤκοα, cf. ἀγορά, above [but cf. Epic axoun; Curtius p. 555]); 1. hearing, by which one perceives sounds; sense of hearing: 1 Co. xii. 17; 2 Pet. ii. 8. Hebraistically, ἀκοῇ ἀκούειν by hearing to hear i. e. to perceive by hearing, Mt. xiii. 14; Acts xxviii. 26, (Is. vi. 9); cf. W. § 44, 8 Rem. 3 Ρ. 339; § 54, 3 p. 466; [B. 183 sq. (159)]. 2. the organ of hearing, the ear: Mk. vii. 35; Lk. vii.1; 2 Tim. iv. 8, 4; Acts xvii. 20; Heb. v. 11. 3. thing heard; a. instruction, namely oral; spec. the preaching of the gospel, [A. V. txt. report]: Jn. xii. 838; Ro. x. 16 sq. (τίς ἐπίστευσε τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν; fr. Is. liii. 1, Hebr. AyD, which in 2S. iv. 4, ete, is rendered ἀγγελία); ἀκοὴ πίστεως preaching on the necessity of faith, (Germ. Glaubenspredigt), Gal. iii. 2,5; λόγος ἀκοῆς i. q. X. ἀκουσθείς [cf. W. 531 (494 sq.)]: 1 Th. ii. 13; Heb. iv. 2. b. hearsay…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀκοή. The word is sometimes concrete, denoting ‘the ear”: so in the late document cited above under ἀκλινής, and in P Oxy I. 1294 (vi/A bp.) εἰς ἀκοὰς ἐμὰς ἦλθεν. Much earlier is Wiinsch 4 12? (ΠῚ A.D.) where ἀκοάς stands between ἐνκέφαλον [πρόσωϊπον and ὀφρ[ ῦ9] μυκτῆρας. Its more normal sense of ‘‘ hearing”? appears in a would-be cultured letter, BGU IV. 10808 (iii/A.D.) (= Chrest. I. p. 564) καὶ ἡμεῖς δὲ ἀκοῇ ἀπόντες ὡς παρόντες διαθέσι ηὐφράνθημεν :

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀκοή (akoē) — hearing.

ἀκοή, ἡ,

Epic dialect ἀκουή· (ἀκοϝ, compare ἀκούω):— hearing, sound heard, ἕκαθεν δέ τε γίγνετ᾽ ἀ.[Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. thing heard, tidings, μετὰ πατρὸς ἀκουὴν ἱκέσθαι, βῆναι, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κατὰ τὴν Σόλωνος ἀκοήν according to Solon's story, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; report, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. σοφοῖς thing for wise men to listen to, [Refs]; ἀκοῇ ἱστορεῖν, παραλαβεῖν τι by hearsay, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς ἀ. τῶν προγεγενημένων traditions, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀκοὴν μαρτυρεῖν, προσάγειν, give, bring hearsay evidence, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἐκ γὰρ ἀκουῆς οἰκτίρω σε[Refs 6th c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀκοή

akoe

from 191; hearing (the act, the sense or the thing heard):--audience,

ear, fame, which ye heard, hearing, preached, report, rumor.

see GREEK for 191

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀκοή, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

hearing, faculty of hearing, ear

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀκοή akoē 24x

hearing; the act or sense of hearing, 1 Cor. 12:17; 2 Pet. 2:8; the instrument of hearing, the ear, Mk. 7:35; a thing heard; announcement, instruction, doctrine, Jn. 12:38; Rom. 10:16; report, Mt. 4:24, et al

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀκοή a hearing, the sound heard, Il.

the thing heard, hearsay, report, news, tidings, μετὰ πατρὸς ἀκουήν in quest of tidings of his father, Od.; ἀκοῆι ἱστορεῖν, παραλαβεῖν τι to know by hearsay, Hdt.; so, ἐξ ἀκοῆς λέγειν Plat.

the sense of hearing, Hdt., etc.

the act of hearing, hearing, ἀκοῆι κλύειν, ἀκοαῖς δέχεσθαι, εἰς ἀκοὰς ἔρχεταί τι Soph., Eur.; δι᾽ ἀκοῆς αἰσθάνεσθαι Plat.

the ear, Sapph., Aesch.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSF — Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%hearing
hearing50% · 12×news13% · 3×ears8% · 2×report8% · 2×rumors8% · 2×hearing?4% · 1×ear4% · 1×hearings4% · 1×

24 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial38%object33%subject25%predicate4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 24 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰςπιστεύωI believe, have ἀπέρχομαιI come or go awa
καίand, even, also, nam
πόλεμοςa war, battle, sγάρfor
ἐκ
Disjπίστιςfaith, belief, t
λέγωI say, speak
Article theκαίand, even, also,
δέbut, on the other ha
Article the
ἀκοήnews24×
what comes after →
Article the
λαόςa people, the crδέbut, on the otheδίκαιοςjust, righteous,
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,βούλομαιI will, intend,
αὐτός
εἰςεὐθέωςimmediately, soo
ἀκούωI hear, listen
καίand, even, also,
πόλεμοςa war, battle, strif
ὁράωI see, look uponμήNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀκοή · 24× in the New Testament
Matthew Mark Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Timothy Acts Galatians Hebrews 1 Thessalonians 2 Peter John Luke
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 29 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 4c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ λόγον καὶ ἀκοὴν ὑπερβάλλει μείζω καὶ σεμνότερα ὄντα ἢ ὡς θνητοῦ τινος ὀργάνοις ἐναρμοσθῆναι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.37c. AD 75–95

τῶν δὲ πρὸς τὴν ἀκοὴν καταπλαγέντων, εἰ ὑπό τε τοῦ δίψους καὶ τῆς ὁδοιπορίας τεταλαιπωρημένοις ἀνάγκη γένοιτο κόπτειν τὴν πέτραν, ὁ Μωυσῆς πλήττει τῇ βακτηρίᾳ, καὶ χανούσης ἐξέβλυσεν ὕδωρ πολὺ καὶ διαυγέστατον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 9.1c. AD 100

λέγει κύριος ἐν τῷ προφήτῃ: Εἰς ἀκοὴν ὠτίου ὑπήκουσάν μου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 5th c. AD 7th c. AD
BGU 4 1080AD 201–AD 300

ἡμῶν εὐχὰς καὶ προσευχάς, ἐφʼ αἷς οἱ θεοὶ τέλειον ἐπακούσαντες παρέσχον. καὶ ἡμεῖς δὲ ἀκοῇ ἀπόντες ὡς παρόντες διαθέσει ηὐφράνθημεν κατευχόμενοι ἐπὶ τοῖς μέλλουσι καὶ ὅπως γενόμενοι παρʼ ὑμῖν

P.Nekr. 23Chosis (Oasis MagnaAD 290–AD 292

ἐνέμετο πρὸς τὸν τῆς ζωῆς αὐτοῦ χρόνον, μετὰ δὲ θάνατον αὐτοῦ, ἀκήρατοί σου αἱ ἀκοαί, ὡσαύτως καὶ αὐτὸς ἐκαρπωσάμην τὰς προσόδους τῆς τάξεως ἐκ διαδοχῆς τοῦ ἡμετέρου πατρός· οὐκ

P.Ammon 1 7Alexandria bzw. PanopolisAD 348

ὡς εἴη τελευτήσας ἐκεῖνος, πρὸ χρόνου γὰρ βραχέος τοῦτο ἀκήκοα, οὐ γὰρ ταχέως εἰς ἀκοὴν τῶν οἰκείων ἀφικνεῖται ὁ περὶ τοῦ θανάτου τῶν ἐπὶ ξένης λόγος διὰ τὸ μηδένα

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
αὐτοῦautos of Him G846 Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Amplified meaning
his fame, reputation
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-GSM — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-GSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςof Him5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
εἰςeis into G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%into
into33% · 595×to32% · 570×for10% · 185×in9% · 160×unto4% · 69×toward2% · 44×other renderings8% · 145×other renderings2% · 29×

1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial95%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
βάλλωI cast, throw, rεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inδέbut, on the othe
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in, en
καίand, even, also,μήNegαὐτός
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςοὗτος
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐκκόπτωI cut out, cut oπόλιςa city
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,δίδωμιI offer, give
εἰςinto1766×
what comes after →
Article the
αἰώνan age, a cycle οἶκοςa house, househoοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὗτος
ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem
καίand, even, also,εἰςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅς
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἄνDisj
σύ
καίand, even, also,μήNegἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰς · 1,766× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Mark Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Corinthians Ephesians

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
ὅληνholos all G3650 Adjective · accusative · singular · feminine
108× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'all' or 'whole', meaning complete in every way, is used in the Bible to describe things that are entire or total, like in Luke 5:5 and Acts 11:26.
Tyndale gloss
all
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὅλος (i.e., *holos*) means 'whole' or 'entire,' and it can refer to both persons and things. It is used in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in Luke 5:5 and Acts 11:26, to denote completeness or totality. The lexicons indicate that it can function as an adjective, noun, or adverb, and it often appears with or without an article before a noun.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅλος, -η, -ον,

[in LXX chiefly for כֹּל;]

of persons and things, whole, entire, complete;

of indefinite ideas, c. subst. anarth.: Lk 5:5, Ac 11:26 28:30, Tit 1:11; ὅλον ἄνθρωπον (an entire man; v. Field, Notes, 93), Jo 7:23; ὅλη Ἰερουσαλήμ (= πᾶσα Ἰ, Mt 2:3; v. Bl., § 47, 9), Ac 21:31.

Definite, c. art.;

preceding subst.: Mt 4:23, 24, Lk 8:39, I Co 12:17, al.;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅλος, -7, -ov, Sept. for 3, [fr. Pind. (Hom.) down], whole, (all): with an anarthrous subst. five [six] times in the N. Τ᾽, viz. ὅλον ἄνθρωπον, Jn. vii. 23; ἐνιαυτὸν ὅλον, Acts Xi. 26; ὅλη ἱΙερουσαλήμ, Xxi. 31; διετίαν ὅλην, XXViii. 30; ὅλους οἴκους, Tit. i. 11; [to which add, δὲ ὅλης νυκτός, Lk. ν. ὅ LT Tr WH]. usually placed before a substantive which has the article: ὅλη ἡ Γαλιλαία, Mt. iv. 23; ὅλη ἡ Συρία, 24; καθ᾽ ὅλην τὴν πόλιν, Lk. viii. 39; ὅλον τὸ σῶμα, Mt. ν. 29 sq.; vi. 22. sq.; Lk. xi. 34; 1 Co. xii. 17; Jas. iii. 2, ete.; [ὅλη ἡ ἐκκλησία, Ro. xvi. 23 LT Tr WH); ὅλην τ. ἡμέραν, Mt. xx. 6; Ro. viii. 36; ὅλος ὁ νόμος, Mt. xxii. 40; Gal. v. 3; Jas. ii. 10; ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ καρδίᾳ cov, Mt. xxii. 37; ἐξ ὅλης τ. καρδίας σου, Mk. xii 80, and many other exx. it is placed after a substantive which has the article [W. 131 (124) note; B. § 125, 6]: ἡ πόλις ὅλη, Mk. i. 33; Acts xix. 29 [Ree.]…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὅλος. P Grenf II. 773° (iti/iv a.D.) (= Selections, p. 121) τῆς ὅλης δα[πά]νης, “the whole outlay,” P Oxy VI. 903* (iv/A.D.) ἐπὶ ὅλας ἑ[πτ]ὰ ἡμέρας, ‘for seven whole days,” and Priéene 112°5 (after B.c. 84) διὰ τοῦ χειμῶνος ὅλου, «ἐ during the whole winter”’ (cf. Lk 5°). See also P Thead 351 (A.D. 299), where, at the end of a deed of sale, the vendor announces—typaa τὰ ὅλα. With the use of ὅλος in Jn 9*4, 131°, we may compare P Fay 1198 (c. A.D. 100) χόρτον σαπρὸν καὶ ὥλον (1. ὅλον) λελυμένον, ‘rotten hay, the whole of it decayed” (Edd.). Other exx. are P Tebt I. 3315 (B.C. 112) (= Selections, p. 31), where the instructions for the entertainment of a Roman visitor are summed up in the words—rd δ᾽ ὅλον ἐπὶ πάν[των] τὴν μεγίστην…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅλος (holos) — all.

ὅλος, η, ον,

Ionic dialect οὖλος, η, ον, as in [Refs 8th c.BC+] (compare ἡμι-ολίας [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅλως uncertain in [Refs 6th c.BC+]:—whole, entire, complete in all its parts, of persons and things, ἄρτος οὖλος a whole loaf, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μηνὶ δ᾽ ἄρ᾽ οὔλῳ in a whole month, [Refs]; οὖλος ὁρᾷ, οὖλος δὲ νοεῖ, οὖλος δέ τ᾽ ἀκούει (i.e. ὁ θεός) [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ὅλος ἑσπέρας ὀφθαλμός, i.e. the full moon, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ ὅ. χρόνος[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ ὤμοις ὅλην πόλιν φέρων a whole city, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πόλεις ὅλαι whole, entire cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅλη ἡ πόλις, the city as a whole, [Refs]; ὅλους ποιητὰς ἐκμανθάνειν learn whole poets by heart, [Refs] substantive, τῆς ἡμέρας ὅλης in the course of the whole day, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅλην τὴν νύκτα or τὴν νύκτα ὅλην, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: less frequently between Article and substantive, τὸν ὅ. ἀμφὶ…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅλος

holos

a primary word; "whole" or "all", i.e. complete (in extent, amount,

time or degree), especially (neuter) as noun or adverb:--all,

altogether, every whit, + throughout, whole.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅλος, η, ον

Adj

all, the whole, entire

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅλος holos 109x

all, whole, entire, Mt. 1:22; 4:23, 24

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASF — Adjective · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ol: Used in various combinations, and with different meanings.

(1) All along, "Weeping all along as he went" (Jer 41:6), i.e. throughout the whole way he went, feigning equal concern with the men from Shiloh, etc., for the destruction of the Temple, so as to put them off their guard.

(2) All in all, "That God may be all in all" (1Co 15:28, Greek: panta en pasin, "all things in all (persons and) things"). "The universe, with all it comprises, will wholly answer to God's will and reflect His mind" (Dummelow).

(3) All one, "It is all one" (Job 9:22), "it makes no difference whether I live or die."

(4) At all, "If thy father miss me at all" (1Sa 20:6), "in any way," "in the least."

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
80%all
all80% · 92×whole16% · 18×other renderings4% · 5×

115 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial57%subject24%object16%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 108 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐν
καίand, even, also,οὗτοςπεριάγωI lead about, go
ἐκ
καίand, even, also,σύαὐτός
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώἀρχιερεύςhigh priest, chiγραμματεύςa scribe, town-c
εἰς
αὐτόςοὗτοςἀποστέλλωI send forth, se
κατά
ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oἀπέρχομαιI come or go awaδιδάσκωI teach
ὅλοςall108×
what comes after →
Article the
σῶμαbody, fleshγῆthe earth, soil,οἶκοςa house, househo
καίand, even, also, nam
σύζημιόωI inflict loss uγίνομαιI come into bein
γίνομαιI come into being, a
ἵναin order that, sὡςas, like as, how
συνάγωI gather together
ἐναὐτός
ἐν
ἴδιοςone’s own, privaArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅλος · 108× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Mark Luke John Revelation 1 Corinthians James Romans 1 John Galatians Hebrews

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 98 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 25c. AD 40

εἰ δὲ τὸ μέρος εἰκὼν εἰκόνος [δῆλον ὅτι] καὶ τὸ ὅλον εἶδος, σύμπας οὗτος ὁ αἰσθητὸς κόσμος, εἰ μείζων τῆς ἀνθρωπίνης ἐστίν, μίμημα θείας εἰκόνος, δῆλον ὅτι καὶ ἡ ἀρχέτυπος σφραγίς, ὅν φαμεν νοητὸν εἶναι κόσμον, αὐτὸς ἂν εἴη [τὸ παράδειγμα, ἀρχέτυπος…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.28c. AD 75–95

καὶ γενομένου τούτου κατανοήσας τὴν ὅλην ὕλην διεχώρισε τό τε φῶς καὶ τὸ σκότος καὶ τῷ μὲν ὄνομα ἔθετο νύκτα, τὸ δὲ ἡμέραν ἐκάλεσεν ἑσπέραν τε καὶ ὄρθρον τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ φωτὸς καὶ τὴν ἀνάπαυσιν προσαγορεύσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 12.4c. AD 100

καὶ πάλιν ἐν ἑτέρῳ προφήτῃ λέγει: Ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθῆ καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα ὁδῷ δικαίᾳ μου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

σιτοφόρου ἀδιαιρέτου ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ βορρᾶ πεδίωι Παθύρεως τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος ἕβδομον· γείτονες ὅλης τῆς γῆς· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ Ψεμμώνθου βορρᾶ γῆ Φαμούνιος ἀπηλιώτου κοιλὰς διῶρυξ καλούμενος

P.Amh. 2 92Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 162–AD 163

ἑνὶ ἐν κώμῃ Ἡρακλείᾳ Θεμίστου μερίδος καὶ τελέσειν εἰς τὸν τῆς ὠνῆς λόγον ὑπὲρ ὅλου τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς ὀγδοήκοντα ὀβολοὺς ὀγδοήκοντα σύνπαντι λόγῳ, ὧν καὶ τὴν διαγραφὴν ποιήσω

P.Amh. 2 93Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 181

Ἡρακλείᾳ τῆς Θεμίστου μερίδος ἐνεργὸν ἐξηρτισμένον ἅπασι σὺν τοῖς οὖσι χρηστηρίοις πᾶσι, φόρου τοῦ ὅλου ἐνιαυτοῦ ἐλαίου ῥαφανίνου κεραμίων ἑπτὰ θάλλου Εἰσίοις ἡμιχόου καὶ Ἀμεστεσίοις χοὸς ἔτι δὲ καὶ

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
τὴνho <the> G3588 Article · accusative · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
Συρίαν·Suria Syria; G4947 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
8× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Syria refers to a region in Asia, mentioned in the Bible as a place Jesus visited, in Matthew 4:24 and Luke 2:2.
Amplified meaning
the region, province
Tyndale gloss
Syria
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

Συρία refers to Syria, a region in Asia bordered by various geographical features. It appears multiple times in the New Testament, specifically in Matthew, Luke, and Acts. The entries indicate that it is a significant area, historically linked to Palestine and other regions. There is no notable disagreement among the lexicons regarding its meaning.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Συρία, -ας, ή

Syria: Mt 4:24, Lk 2:2, Ac 15:23, 41 18:18 20:3 21:3, Ga 1:21.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Συρία, -as, 7, Syria; in the N. T. a region of Asia, bounded on the N. by the Taurus and Amanus ranges, on the E. by the Euphrates and Arabia, on the S. by Palestine, and on the W. by Phenicia and the Mediterranean, [cf. BB.DD. s. v. Syria; Ryssel in Herzog ed. 2, s. v. Syrien; ef. also’Avtidyera, 1 and Aapaokés |: Mt. iv. 24) kei. 2) Acts xv. 20, 41; ΧυΠ| 18; ocx. 9; Xx. O's Gal. i. 21. [On the art. with it cf. W. § 18, 5 a.]

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Συρία (Suria) — Syria.

(i.e. γῆ); Syria , [Refs 5th c.BC], etc.: Σ. ἡ Παλαιστίνη Palestine , [Refs 5th c.BC]: Κοίλη Σ. the district between Libanus and Anti-libanus, [Refs 1st c.BC] (Middle Liddel)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

∑υρία

Suria

probably of Hebrew origin (6865); Syria (i.e. Tsyria or Tyre), a

region of Asia:--Syria.

see HEBREW for 06865

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Συρία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

Syria

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Συρία Syria 8x

Syria, an extensive country of Asia, Mt. 4:24; Lk. 2:2; Acts 15:23

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

Συρία (sc. γῆ) Syria, Hdt., etc.: Σ. ἡ Παλαιστίνη Palestine, id. Hdt.: Κοίλη Σ. the district between Libanus and Anti-libanus, Strab.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Syria

(Heb. Aram), the name in the Old Testament given to the whole country which lay to the north-east of Phoenicia, extending to beyond the Euphrates and the Tigris. Mesopotamia is called (Gen. 24:10; Deut. 23:4) Aram-naharain (=Syria of the two rivers), also Padan-aram (Gen. 25:20). Other portions of Syria were also known by separate names, as Aram-maahah (1 Chr. 19:6), Aram-beth-rehob (2 Sam. 10:6), Aram-zobah (2 Sam. 10:6, 8). All these separate little kingdoms afterwards became subject to Damascus. In the time of the Romans, Syria included also a part of…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

is the term used throughout our version for the Hebrew Aram , as well as for the Greek Zupia . Most probably Syria is for Tsyria , the country about Tsur or Tyre which was the first of the Syrian towns known to the Greeks. It is difficult to fix the limits of Syria. The limits of the Hebrew Aram and its subdivisions are spoken of under ARAM. Syria proper was bounded by Amanus and Taurus on the north by the Euphrates and the Arabian desert on the east, by Palestine on the south, by the Mediterranean near the mouth of the Orontes, and then by Phoenicia on the west. This tract is about 300 miles long from north to south, and from 50 to 150 miles broad. It contains an area of about 30,000 square miles. General physical features . --The general character of the tract is mountainous, as the Hebrew name Aram (from a roof signifying "height") sufficiently implies. The most fertile and valuable…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

In Hebrew ARAM, a large district of Asia, lying, in the widest acceptation of the name, between the Mediterranean, Mount Taurus, and the Tigris, and thus including Mesopotamia, that is, in Hebrew, Syria of the two rivers. See ARAM 2. Excepting the Lebanon range, it is for the most part a level country. In the New Testament, Syria may be considered as bounded west and north-west by the Mediterranean and by Mount Taurus, which separates it from Cilicia and Cataonia in Asia Minor, east by the Euphrates, and south by Arabia Deserta and Palestine, or rather Judea, for the name Syria included also the northern part of Palestine.

The valley between the ridges of Lebanon and Anti-Lebanon was called Coele-Syria and Phoenicia were subject to the king of Babylon, and they afterwards were tributary to the Persian monarchs. After the country fell into the hands of the Romans, Syria was made the…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ (The highlands lying between the Euphrates River and the Mediterranean Sea)

→ Called ARAM, from the son of Shem Ge 10:22,23; Nu 23:7; 1Ch 1:17; 2:23

→ During the time of Abraham it seems to have embraced the region between the Tigris River and the Euphrates River Ge 24:10; with 25:20

→ Including Padan-aram Ge 25:20; 28:5

→ Minor kingdoms within the region

Aram-zobah, also called, ZOBAH and ZOBA 1Sa 14:47; 2Sa 8:3; 10:6,8; 1Ki 11:23;

Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 27 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Polycarp
Philo of AlexandriaOn Dreams 2.59c. AD 40

ἀλλὰ γὰρ ἐπετειχίσθη τοῖς ὠφελοῦσι τὰ ἡδέα τῆς κενῆς δόξης ἀλείμματα, εἰς ἃ καὶ μυρεψοὶ πονοῦσι καὶ χῶραι μεγάλαι συντελοῦσι, Συρία, Βαβυλών,

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.130c. AD 75–95

Οἱ δὲ Χάμου παῖδες τὴν ἀπὸ Συρίας καὶ Ἀμάνου καὶ Λιβάνου τῶν ὀρῶν γῆν κατέσχον, ὅσα πρὸς θάλασσαν αὐτῆς ἐτέτραπτο καταλαβόντες καὶ τὰ μέχρι τοῦ ὠκεανοῦ ἐξιδιωσάμενοι·

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 1.1.2c. AD 110

ἀκούσαντες γὰρ δεδεμένον ἀπὸ Συρίας ὑπὲρ τοῦ κοινοῦ ὀνόματος καὶ ἐλπίδος, ἐλπίζοντα τῇ προσευχῇ ὑμῶν ἐπιτυχεῖν ἐν Ῥώμῃ θηριομαχῆσαι, ἵνα διὰ τοῦ ἐπιτυχεῖν δυνηθῶ μαθητὴς εἶναι, ἰδεῖν ἐσπουδάσατε:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD

τὸν χειμῶνα, ἵνα εὕρωμεν ὑμᾶς ὑγιαίνοντας. καὶ ἡμεῖς γὰρ πάντες ὑγιαίνομεν. καὶ περὶ τῆς Συρίας ἕως ἄρτι οὐδὲν κακόν. ἐρωτῶ σε ἐὰν ἀκούσῃς περὶ Θερμουθᾶτος πέμψον μοι φάσιν. ἐρωτῶ

P.Stras. 7 688 col. 1Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 216

διοικήσεως καὶ οὐσιακῶν … … ω … κα … τῆς κελευσθείσης … ς Συρίας πυροῦ τε καὶ κριθῆς … ων τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος κδ ἔτους Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Μάρκου Αὐρηλίου

P.Oxy. 43 3091Sinary (Oxyrhynchites)AD 216–AD 217

εἰσδοθεὶς ὑπὸ τοῦ τῶν τόπων κωμογραμματέως εἰς τὸ κατενέγκαι κριθὴν εἰς Ἀλεξάνδριαν πεμπομένην εἰς Συρίαν ἱερῷ στρατεύματι τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Αὐτοκράτορος Σεουήρου Ἀντωνίνου Εὐτυχοῦς Εὐσεβοῦς Σεβαστοῦ, ὀμνύω τὴν τοῦ

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
καὶkai And G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίAnd8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
προσήνεγκανprospherō they brought G4374 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · plural
46× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To bring to means to lead or offer something to someone, especially to God, like in Matthew 4:24 where people brought their sick to Jesus. It's about presenting or offering something to someone.
Tyndale gloss
to bring to
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

προσφέρω is a verb meaning 'to bring to' or 'to offer,' often in the context of presenting gifts or sacrifices to God. It combines the elements of bringing something near and offering it, applicable in various contexts such as offerings in worship (e.g., Matthew 2:11) and dealing with others (Hebrews 12:7). The word appears frequently in the New Testament and is rooted in both classical and biblical Greek.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

προσ-φέρω,

[in LXX chiefly for קרב hi.;]

to bring to, lead to: c. acc. et dat. pers., Mt 4:24 8:16 9:2, 32 14:35 17:16, Mk 2:4 (WH, R, txt.; sc. αὐτόν) 10:13, Lk 18:15 23:14; pass., Mt 12:22 (act., WH, txt.) 18:24 (προσήχθη, WH) 19:13; c. acc. rei, Mt 25:20; id. c. dat. pers., Mt 22:19, Lk 23:36; τ. στόματι, Jo 19:29; metaph., c. dat pers., to deal with, He 12:7 (cl.).

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

προσ-φέρω; impf. προσέφερον; 1 aor. προσήνεγκα ; 2 aor. προσήνεγκον; pt. προσενήνοχα (Heb. xi. 17); Pass., pres. προσφέρομαι; 1 aor. προσηνέχθην ; [see reff. s. v. φέρω]; fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., and Hdt. down; Sept. often for 277, also for #37, 0.21, ete., sometimes also for TIT where offering sacrifices is spoken of (as 1 Κα. xviii. 36 Compl.; 2 Chr. xxix. 7; Jer. xiv. 12); 1. to bring lo, lead to: twa τινι, one to a person who can heal him or is ready to show him some other kindness, Mt. iv. 24; viii. 16; ix. 2,32; xiv. 35; xvii. 16; Mk. ii. 4 (se. τινά) x WH Tr mrg.; x. 13; Lk. xviii. 15; pass. in Mt. xii. 22 [where L WH txt. act.]; xviii. 24 R GT; xix. 13; — one to a person who is to judge him: Lk. xxiii. 14; τινὰ ἐπὶ Tas συναγωγὰς καὶ Tas ἀρχάς, Lk. xii. 11 [W. § 52, 3] (where T Tr txt. WH εἰσφέρωσιν). προσφέρω τι, to bring or present a thing, Mt. xxv. 20; τί τινι, to reach or hand…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

προσφέρω, “bring to,” “‘ present,’’ is seen in P Fay 2117 (a.p. 134) τὰ βιβλία προσφέροντες o[t]s ὀφίλουσιν, ““ presenting their accounts to their creditors,” P Giss I. κοὐδ (a.p. 259) προσφέρων τῇ πόλει... δραχμὰς δεκαεπτὰ ὀβολόν, and P Meyer 23% (end iv/A.D.) παρὰ Τιθοῆτι τῷ προσφέροντί σοι ταῦτά pov τὰ γράμματα: cf. P Par 63!% (B.c. 164) (= P Petr IIL. p. 18) καλῶς ποιήσεις τὴν πᾶσαν προσενεγκάμενος ἐκτένειαν, ‘“‘you will do well in using every effort” (Mahaffy), and P Tebt I. 3318 (B.c. 112) (=Se/ections, p- 31) τὴν πᾶσαν προσενέγκαι σπουδήν. The force seen in Heb 127 appears in P Par 4659 (8.6. 152) (= UPZ i. p. 338) where Apollonius appeals to his brother Ptolemaeus to examine personally into his grievance against a third party—vopitw γὰρ μάλιστα τῶν ἄλλων παρακολουθήκοντά σε τῆι ἀληθείαι πικρότερον προσενεχθήσεσθ᾽ αὐτῶι, “‘when you have investigated the truth you will deal with…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

προσφέρω (prospherō) — to bring to.

προσφέρω

(once ποσφέρω, which see), Doric dialect ποτιφέρω Prov. cited in [Refs 1st c.AD+]: future

__A προσοίσω [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect aorist προσένεικα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect aorist passive προσηνείχθην [Refs]:—bring to or upon, apply to, π. πύργοισι κλιμάκων προσαμβάσεις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μηχανὰς [τοῖσι τείχεσι] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. νόμον, ψήφισμα πρὸς τὴν συγγραφήν bring to bear against.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but χέρα τινὶ προσενεγκεῖν lay hands upon.. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς, in hostile sense, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (but also in a friendly relation, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {προσφεύγω}, and in supplication to the gods, hold out one's hands to, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ἀνάγκην or ἀναγκαίην τισὶ π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so of surgical or medical treatment, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πταρμὸν [τῇ λυγγί] [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

προσφέρω

prosphero

from 4314 and 5342 (including its alternate); to bear towards, i.e.

lead to, tender (especially to God), treat:--bring (to, unto), deal

with, do, offer (unto, up), present unto, put to.

see GREEK for 4314

see GREEK for 5342

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

προσφέρω

v.

I bring to, offer

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

προσφέρω prospherō 47x

to bear or bring to, Mt. 4:24; 25:20; to bring to or before magistrates, Lk. 12:11; 23:14; to bring near to, apply to, Jn. 19:29; to offer, tender, proffer, as money, Acts 8:18; to offer, present, as gifts, oblations, etc., Mt. 2:11; 5:23; Heb. 5:7; to offer in sacrifice, Mk. 1:44; Lk. 5:14; to offer up any one as a sacrifice to God, Heb. 9:25, 28; 11:17; mid. to bear one’s…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

προσφέρω doric ποτι-φέρω fut. προσοίσω ionic aor. pass. -ενείχθην to bring to or upon, apply to, Lat. applicare, Hdt., Eur., etc.; but, πρ. χεῖρά τινι to lay hands upon one, Pind.; also to offer one's hand, as a friend, Xen.:—without dat. to apply, exhibit, employ, use, βίην Hdt.; πρ. τόλμαν to bring it to bear, Pind.: also, πρ. πόλεμον Hdt.

to add, τί τινι Soph., Eur.; τι πρός τι Hdt.

to present, offer, give, λουτρὰ πατρί Soph.; δῶρα Thuc.; θυσίας NTest.

esp. of meat and drink, to offer, to set before one, Xen.; πρ. τινὶ ἐμπιεῖν καὶ φαγεῖν id. Xen.

to bring forward, quote, cite, Pind.

to bring forward proposals, make an offer, πρ. λόγον or λόγους τινι Hdt., Thuc.: absol., πρ. περὶ ὁμολογίας Hdt., Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-3P — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · plural
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
10%offered
offered10% · 5×they brought8% · 4×do offer8% · 4×he may offer6% · 3×offering6% · 3×they were bringing6% · 3×brought6% · 3×offer4% · 2×other renderings44% · 21×

48 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 29 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb98%object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 46 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἱερεύςa priestΣυρίαSyriaἐκεῖνος
ὅς
ἕωςuntil, as far asοὗτοςαἷμαblood
αὐτός
θησαυρόςa treasure, storπρός
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
καίand, even, also,ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come o
τότεthen
προσφέρωthey brought46×
what comes after →
αὐτός
πᾶςall, the whole, δαιμονίζομαιI am demon-posseArticle the
Article the
δῶρονa gift, presentθεόςGod, a godArticle the
περί
Article theἁμαρτίαa sin
ἐγώ
Article theἔτοςa year
ὑπέρ
εἷςoneἑαυτοῦ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπροσφέρω · 46× in the New Testament
Hebrews Matthew Luke Acts Mark John
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 109 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 165c. AD 40

Τὰς δὲ γοητείας καὶ ἀπάτας αὑτῆς ἡδονὴ τῷ μὲν ἀνδρὶ οὐ τολμᾷ προσφέρειν, τῇ δὲ γυναικὶ καὶ διὰ ταύτης ἐκείνῳ, πάνυ προσφυῶς καὶ εὐθυβόλως·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.184c. AD 75–95

καὶ ὁ μὲν ταῦτʼ ἀκούσας θυσίαν προσφέρει τῷ θεῷ κελευσθεὶς ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.7c. AD 100

λέγει δὲ πάλιν πρὸς αὐτούς: Μὴ ἐγὼ ἐνετειλάμην τοῖς πατράσιν ὑμῶν ἐκπορευομένοις ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, προσενέγκαι μοι ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ θυσίας;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 1st c. BC
P.Mich. 5 322 aTebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 46

τοῦ νῦν καὶ ταῖς προγεγραμμέναις ἑαυτοῦ θυγατράσι Ταμαρῆτι καὶ Θαυβάστι, τῇ μὲν Ταμαρῆτι ἃς προσενήνοχεν αὐτῇ ἔτι πάλαι ὁ αὐτὸς Ψύφις ὃς καὶ Ἁρποχρατίων, διʼ ἧς ἔθετο ἡ Ταμαρῆς

P.Fam.Tebt. 21Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 122

συνγραφὴν γάμου τελειωθεῖσαν διὰ τοῦ αὐτοῦ γραφείου τῷ ἐνάτῳ ἔτει θεοῦ Τραιανοῦ, μεθʼ ἃς προσήνεγκεν αὐτῇ κατὰ τὴν αὐτὴν συμβίωσιν φερνὴν ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς πεντακοσίας , ἁπάσας δραχμὰς χιλίας ἑκατὸν

P.Fay. 21Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 134

παρὰ ταῦτα ποιήσῃ. ἐπεὶ δὲ καὶ τοῦτό τινες ἐμέμψαντο ὡς αὐτοὶ μὲν τὰ βιβλία προσφέροντες οἷς ὀφείλουσιν, ἐκείνους δὲ μὴ βουλομένους παρʼ αὐτῶν λαμβάνειν ἵνα τὴν παρολκὴν ἐξωνήσωνται τῷ

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
αὐτῷautos to Him G846 Personal pronoun · dative · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-DSM — Personal pronoun · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-DSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςto Him5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
πάνταςpas all G3956 Adjective · accusative · plural · masculine
1,242× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means all or every, as in Matthew 3:10 and Romans 7:8, where it refers to everything or all people, emphasizing the universal nature of God's message.
Tyndale gloss
all
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πᾶς (i.e., *pas*) means 'all' or 'every' and appears in various forms, including masculine, feminine, and neuter. It is used in the New Testament to denote totality, as in 'all things' or 'every kind,' and can function as an adjective or pronoun. Notably, it can also imply 'the whole' when used with definite articles, as seen in verses like Matthew 28:18.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, gen., παντός, πάσης, παντός,

[in LXX chiefly for כֹּל;]

all, every.

As adj.,

c. subst. anarth., all, every, of every kind: Mt 3:10 4:23, Mk 9:49, Lk 4:37, Jo 2:10, Ac 27:20, Ro 7:8, Re 18:17, al. mult.; pl., all, Ac 22:15, Ro 5:12, He 1:6, al.; of the highest degree, π. ἐξουσία (προθυμία, χαρά), Mt 28:18,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, en. παντός, πάσης, παντός, [dat. plur. Lchm. πᾶσι ten times, -σιν seventy-two times; Tdf. -σι five times (see Proleg. p. 98 sq.), -ow seventy-seven times; Treg. -ow eighty-two times; WH -ox fourteen times, -ow sixty-eight times; see N, v (ἐφελκυστικόν)], Hebr. 75, [fr. Hom. down], all, every; it is used I. adjectively, and 1. with anarthrous nouns; a. any, every one (86. of the class denoted by the noun annexed to mas); with the Singular: as πᾶν δένδρον, Mt. iii. 10; πᾶσα θυσία, Mk. ix. 49 [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br. the cl.]; add, Mt. v.11; xv. 13; Lk. iv. 37; Jn.ii. 10; xv.2; Acts ii.43; v.42; Ro. xiv. 11; 1 Co. iv. 17; Rev. xviii. 17, and very often; πᾶσα ψυχὴ ἀνθρώπου, Ro. ii. 9 (πᾶσα ἀνθρ. ψυχή, Plat. Phaedr. p- 249e.); πᾶσα συνείδησις ἀνθρώπων, 2 Co. iv. 2; mas λεγόμενος θεός, 2 Th. ii. 4; πᾶς ἅγιος ἐν Χριστῷ, Phil. iv. 21sqq. with the Plural, all or any that are…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παῖς. In Gnomon 41 (¢. A.D. 150) it is laid down—éav Αἰγύπτιος ἐκ κοπρίας [ἀν]έληται παῖδα καὶ τοῦτον υἱοποιήσηται, μετὰ θάνατον τεταρτολο[ γεῖτ]αι, ““1Γ an Egyptian shall take up a child from the dungheap, and adopt him as a son, he shall be mulcted after his death to the extent of one fourth of his property.” For παῖς applied to a female child see P Strass I. 41° (A.D. 250) ἐκδικῆσαι τὰ τῆς παιδός, and P Oxy 1 5215 (A.D. 325) εΠδαμὲν τὴν παῖδα ἔχουσαν κατὰ τῶν εἰσχίων ἀμυχὰς μετὰ πελιωμάτων (see 76. II. p. 319), ““νγῈ saw that the girl had wounds on her hips with livid spots”: cf. Lk 8° (for voc. of address see Pro/eg. pp. 70, 235). The word is commonly applied to slaves, as in Lk 77 a/., e.g. P Lille 27 (iii/B.c.), where 11 male slaves are enumerated under the heading παῖδες, then 2 female slaves, and then again 3 male slaves: cf. P Strass I. 405 (a. p. 569) Κολλοῦθος Βίκτορος…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πᾶς (pas) — all.

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν,

__AAeolic dialect παῖς, παῖσα [Refs 7th c.BC+] feminine πάνσα [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Delph. πάντεσσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also Locrian dialect πάντεσιν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πάντοις [Refs 2nd c.BC+] as accusative masculine in [LXX+7th c.BC+], etc. (but in compounds sometimes long in Attic dialect, [Refs].]—Coll. pronoun, when used of a number, all; when of one only, the whole; of the several persons in a number, every.

__A.I in plural, all, πάντες τε θεοὶ πᾶσαί τε θέαιναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πάντες ὅσοι.. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πάντας ᾧ ἂνπεριτυγχάνῃ, for ὅσοις ἄν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with the Article, see.below [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πᾶς

pas

including all the forms of declension; apparently a primary word; all,

any, every, the whole:--all (manner of, means), alway(-s), any (one),

X daily, + ever, every (one, way), as many as, + no(-thing), X

thoroughly, whatsoever, whole, whosoever.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν

Adj

all, the whole, every kind of

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πᾶς pas 1x

all; in the sg. the whole, entire, usually when the substantive has the article, Mt. 6:29; 8:32; Acts 19:26; every, only with an anarthrous subst., Mt. 3:10; 4:4; pl. all, Mt. 1:17, et al. freq.; πάντα, in all respects, Acts 20:35; 1 Cor. 9:25; 10:33; 11:2; by a Hebraism, a negative with πᾶς is sometimes equivalent to οὐδείς or μηδείς, Mt. 24:22; Lk. 1:37; Acts 10:14; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-APM — Adjective · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-APM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ol: Used in various combinations, and with different meanings.

(1) All along, "Weeping all along as he went" (Jer 41:6), i.e. throughout the whole way he went, feigning equal concern with the men from Shiloh, etc., for the destruction of the Temple, so as to put them off their guard.

(2) All in all, "That God may be all in all" (1Co 15:28, Greek: panta en pasin, "all things in all (persons and) things"). "The universe, with all it comprises, will wholly answer to God's will and reflect His mind" (Dummelow).

(3) All one, "It is all one" (Job 9:22), "it makes no difference whether I live or die."

(4) At all, "If thy father miss me at all" (1Sa 20:6), "in any way," "in the least."

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
62%all
all62% · 789×all things12% · 156×every12% · 150×everyone6% · 76×everything3% · 34×other renderings3% · 40×other renderings2% · 19×

1,264 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 28 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject40%adverbial30%object21%predicate5%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,242 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύλόγοςa word, speech,
ἐν
καίand, even, also,ἀλλάbut, exceptἐγώ
Article the
αὐτόςὅςArticle the
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδείκνυμιI point out, shoπροσφέρωI bring to, offe
ἐπί
καίand, even, also,ἐγώεἰμίI am, exist
πᾶςall1242×
what comes after →
Article the
ἔθνοςa race, people, λαόςa people, the crπιστεύωI believe, have
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theχορτάζωI feed, satisfyδιά
σύ
εἰμίI am, existἐνκαίand, even, also,
γάρfor
Article theσύοὗτος
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theοὗτοςὅς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπᾶς · 1,242× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians Romans Mark John Revelation Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians Colossians

27 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 10c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ πατὴρ ἐκγόνων καὶ δημιουργὸς τῶν δημιουργηθέντων στοχάζεται τῆς διαμονῆς καὶ ὅσα μὲν ἐπιζήμια καὶ βλαβερὰ μηχανῇ πάσῃ διωθεῖται, τὰ δὲ ὅσα ὠφέλιμα καὶ λυσιτελῆ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον ἐκπορίζειν ἐπιποθεῖ·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς οἱ Νώχου ἔγγονοι πᾶσαν τὴν οἰκουμένην ἐπῴκησαν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.4c. AD 100

πεφανέρωκεν γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, ὅτι οὕτε θυσιῶν οὔτε ὁλοκαυτωμάτων οὔτε προσφορῶν χρῄζει, λέγων ὅτε μέν:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

γῆ Σενπελαίας, βορρᾶ γῆ Πανᾶτος ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς Ἀραμείους, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντων πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πανοβχούνιος ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δύο . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐτῶν λ χαλκοῦ δραχμῶν τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας καὶ διακοσίας . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πανοβχοῦνις ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Εὔνους ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
τοὺςho the G3588 Article · accusative · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-APM — Article · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-APM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
κακῶςkakōs sick G2560 Adverb
16× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
In the Bible, this word means to be in a bad state, either physically or morally. It's used to describe being ill or sick, like in Matthew 4:24 and Mark 1:32. This word can also mean to be treated badly or to suffer.
Amplified meaning
sick, afflicted
Tyndale gloss
badly
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word κακῶς (transliterated as kakōs) is an adverb derived from κακός (bad). It means 'badly' or 'ill,' and can refer to both physical ailments and moral wrongs. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts describing illness (e.g., Matthew 4:24) and moral misconduct (e.g., John 18:23). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement about its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κακῶς

(< κακός),

adv.,

[in LXX: Wi 18:19, IV Mac 6:17, al.; κ. εἰπεῖν, ἐρεῖν (ארר, קלל pi.), Ex 22:28(27), Le 19:14, Is 8:21; κ. ἔχειν (חלה, Ez 34:4, al.;]

badly, ill;

in physical sense: κ. ἔχειν, to be ill, Mt 4:24 8:16 9:12 14:35 17:15, Mk 1:32, 34 2:17 6:55, Lk 5:31 7:2; πάσχειν, Mt 17:15 (WH, mg.); δαιμονίζεσθαι, Mt 15:22; κακοὺς κ. ἀπολέσει (as freq. in cl., v. LS, s.v.; MM, Exp., xv), evil that they are, he will evilly, etc., Mt…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κακῶς, (κακός), adv., [fr. Hom. down], badly, ill,i.e. a. [in a physical sense] miserably: ἔχειν, to be ill, sick [see ἔχω, 11. a.], Mt. iv. 24; viii. 16; ix. 12; xiv. 35; [xvii. 15 LTrtxt. WH txt.]; Mk. [i. 32, 34]; ii. 17; [vi. 55]; Lk. v. 31; vii. 2, ete.; πάσχειν, Mt. xvii. 15 [RGT Tr mre. WH mrg.]; δαιμονίζεσθαι, Mt. xv. 22; κακοὺς κακῶς ἀπολέσει, Mt. xxi. 41, on this combination of words with verbs of destroying, perishing, ete., which is freq. in Grk. writ. also, cf. Kuinoel ad loc.; W. § 68, 1. b. [morally] improperly, wrongly: In. xviii. 23 ; κακῶς εἰπεῖν Twa, to speak ill of, revile, one, Acts xxiil. 5; with bad intent, αἰτεῖσθαι. Jas. iv. 3.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κακῶς. For the phrase κακῶς ἔχειν, as in Mt 44 etc., cf. P Oxy VI. 935} (iii/A.D.) ἔμελλον... ἀναβῆναι . . ἐπεὶ of παρὰ] Σαραπίω[νος] εἶπον [κακ]ῶς ἔχειν ald]t[dv, “I intended to come up since Sarapion’s friends said that he was ill” (Edd.), 26. 938° (iii/iv A.D.) τῶν οὖν κτηνῶν κακῶς ἐχόντων, ““since, then, the oxen are in a bad way.’’ The combination κακοὺς κακῶς ἀπολέσει αὐτούς in Mt 214! sounds rather literary, but cf. 6 τούτων τι ποιῶν Kaids κακῇ ἐξωλείᾳ ἀπόλοιτο in Sy// 5845 1., which Michel doubtfully assigns to i/B.c. The inser. is from Smyrna, apparently from a temple of Atargatis, whose sacred fishes are protected by this portentous curse: he who injures them is to die, ἰχθυόβρωτος γενόμενος (cf. the formation of the adj. σκωληκόβρωτος, Ac 12%), It seems clear that the collocation κακοὺς κακώς ἀπολέσθαι, starting as a literary phrase, had been perpetuated in common parlance…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κακῶς (kakōs) — badly.

Included with: κᾰκός, ή, όν,

__A bad:

__A.I of persons,

__A.I.1 of appearance, ugly, εἶδος μὲν ἔην κακός [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.I.2 of birth, ill-born, mean, γένος ἐστὲ διοτρεφέων βασιλήων.., ἐπεὶ οὔ κε κακοὶ τοιούσδε τέκοιεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.I.3 of courage, craven, base, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ἕκτωρ σε κ. καὶ ἀνάλκιδα φήσει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐδαμῶν κακίονες[Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.4 bad of his kind, i. e. worthless, sorry, unskilled, ἡνίοχοι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; [τοξότης] ἢ κ. ἢ ἀγαθός[Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. ἀλήτης a bad beggar,[Refs 4th c.BC+]; κυβερνήτης, ναύτης, [Refs 5th c.BC+] I am not bad in all things, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with infinitive, κ. μανθάνειν [Refs]; [νῆσος] φυτεύεσθαι κακή [Refs]; compare…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κακῶς

kakos

from 2556; badly (physically or morally):--amiss, diseased, evil,

grievously, miserably, sick, sore.

see GREEK for 2556

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κακῶς

Adv

badly, evilly

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κακῶς kakōs 16x

ill, badly; physically ill, sick, Mt. 4:24; 8:16; grievously, vehemently, Mt. 15:22; wretchedly, miserably, Mt. 21:41; wickedly, reproachfully, Acts 23:5; wrongly, criminally, Jn. 18:23; amiss, Jas. 4:3

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κακῶς adverb of κακός D

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
63%sick
sick63% · 10×evil .’6% · 1×wrongly6% · 1×badly6% · 1×miserably6% · 1×grievously6% · 1×evil6% · 1×

16 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 16 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, ἀλλάbut, exceptκράβαττοςa bed, mattress,
ἐγώ
θυγάτηρa daughter
καίand, even, also, nam
σεληνιάζομαιI am a lunatic
κακόςbad, evil
αὐτός
πολύςmuch, many, often
θεραπεύωI care for, atte
κακῶςsick16×
what comes after →
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
ποικίλοςvarious, of diffθεραπεύωI care for, atteπολλάκιςmany times, ofte
δαιμονίζομαιI am demon-possessed
ἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose, am
αὐτός
λαλέωI speak, say
μαρτυρέωI witness, testi
αἰτέωI ask, request, beg,
ἵναin order that, s

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκακῶς · 16× in the New Testament
Matthew Mark Luke Acts James John
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaThat the Worse Attacks the Better 57c. AD 40

Ταῦτα μὲν οὖν ἱκανῶς εἰρῆσθαι νομίζω πρὸς τοὺς εὖ ἢ κακῶς ἑτέρους ποιεῖν δοκοῦντας·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.300c. AD 75–95

φθειρῶν γὰρ τοῖς Αἰγυπτίοις ἐξήνθησεν ἄπειρόν τι πλῆθος ἔνδοθεν ἀναδιδομένων, ὑφʼ ὧν κακοὶ κακῶς ἀπώλλυντο μήτε λουτροῖς μήτε χρίσεσι φαρμάκων διαφθεῖραι τὸ γένος αὐτῶν δυνάμενοι.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 26.26.2c. AD 140

οἱ μὲν τοὺς σπίλους ἔχοντες διάκονοί εἰσι κακῶς διακονήσαντες καὶ διαρπάσαντες χηρῶν καὶ ὀρφανῶν τὴν ζωὴν καὶ ἑαυτοῖς περιποιησάμενοι ἐκ τῆς διακονίας ἧς ἔλαβον διακονῆσαι: ἐὰν οὖν ἐπιμείνωσι τῇ αὐτῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ, ἀπέθανον καὶ οὐδεμία αὐτοῖς ἐλπὶς ζωῆς:…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC undated 1st c. AD
P.Graux 2 9Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 33

λογευτῶν λαογραφίας Φιλαδελφείας τῆς Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοίτου νομοῦ. ἔστι τὸ καθʼ ἓν ὧν κακῶς ἐσείσθημεν ὑπὸ Διονυσίου τοῦ Ἀλκίμου γενομένου γραμματέως Διονυσοδώρου στρατηγοῦ καὶ τῶν τοῦ Διονυσίου γραμματέων

P. Gen. 1 7Arsinoites (?)AD 86

φυλαχθήτωσαν ὥσπερ οἱ πρὸ ἐμοῦ ἔστησαν κατὰ τὸ ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἔθος. πρὸς δὲ τοὺς κακῶς ὑπεσχημένους ἀναλημφθήτωσαν αἱ δοθεῖσαι ὑπʼ αὐτῶν τιμαὶ ὡς ἔθος. Φαῶφι δ. Ἀπολλωνίδηι ὀράπει καὶ

φυλαχθήτωσαν ὤσπερ οἱ πρὸ ἐμοῦ ἔστησαν κατὰ τὸ ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἔθος· πρὸς δὲ τοὺς κακῶς ὑπεσχημένους ἀναλημφθήτωσαν αἱ δοθεῖσαι ὑπʼ αὐτῶν τιμαὶ ὡς ἔθος. ἔρρωσο. ἔτους ϛ Φαῶφι

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
ἔχοντας,echō having G2192 Verb · present · active · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
709× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means to have or hold something, like a possession or ability. It is used in many ways, such as having power or being with someone. The Bible uses it in Revelation 5:8 and 14:6.
Tyndale gloss
to have/be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔχω, transliterated as echō, means 'to have' or 'to hold' and is used in various contexts, including possession, ability, and condition. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often relating to physical possession or metaphorical concepts like keeping faith or emotions. Notably, it can also refer to being pregnant, as seen in Matthew 1:18. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔχω,

[in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), בַּעַל, יֵשׁ, etc., 59 words in all;]

(on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, v. M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183),

to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions.

Trans.;

to have, hold, hold fast, etc.;

to hold, as, in the hand: Re 5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Re 1:16 10:2, al.;

of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mt 3:4 22:12, al.; so freq. pres. ptcp. (LS, s.v., A, I, 6; Bl., § 74, 2), Mk 11:13, Jo 18:10, Re 9:17, al.;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔχω ; fut. ἕξω ; impf. εἶχον, [1 pers. plur. εἴχαμεν, 2 Jn. ἔχω 266 5 T Tr WH], 8 pers. plur. εἶχαν (Mk. viii. 7 L T Tr WH; Rey. ix. 8 LT Tr WH; but ef. [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 38; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 165]; B. 40 (35)) and εἴχοσαν (LT Tr WH in Jn. xv. 22, 24; but ef. Bitm. in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 sqq. 491; see his N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 39; Τὰ Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 165; ef. δολεόω ]) ; pres. mid. ptep. ἐχόμενος ; to have,—with 2 aor. act. ἔσχον; pf. ἔσχηκα; I. Transitively. have (hold) in the hand: τὶ ἐν τῇ χειρί, Rev. i. 16; vi. 5; x. 2; xvii. 4; and simply, Rev. v. 8; viii. 3, 6; xiv. 6, ete.; Heb. viii. 3. Ὁ. in the sense of wearing (Lat. gestare) ; of garments, arms and the like: τὸ ἔνδυμα, Mt. iii. 4; xxii. 12; κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων, sc. τί, having a covering hanging down from the head, i.e. having the head covered [B. $130, 5; W. §…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔχω. It may be well to illustrate some of the less usual forms of this common verb. The future σχήσω (cf. Kithner-Blass Gr. 1. ii. p. 112 n.8) is restored by the editor in OGZS 751° (ii/ B.C.) ἐπεὶ θλιβέντες ἐμ πλείοσιν ἀσθενῶς [σχή]σετε. For the 2 aor. with 1 aor. termination (cf. Ac 757 D συνἐσχαν) see BGU 11. 4518 (i/ii A.D.) ἀναγκαίως ἔσχαμεν δ[ι7᾽ ἐπιστολῆς σε ἀσπάσεσθαι, and for ἔσχοσαν cf. OG/S 315°" (B.C. 164-159) ὑφοψίαν μοχθηράν, ἣν Kal περὶ Tod ἀδελφοῦ ἔσχοσαν. In 20. 2237 (iii/B.c.) we have αὐτοὶ ἀπολογισάμενοι περί τε τῆς εὐνοίας ἣν διὰ παντὸς εἰσχήκατε εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν οἰκίαν, and for similar forms see the editor's note ® to 2b. 323. For the trans. use of the verb see such passages as P Oxy IV. 743!® (B.c. 2) εἰ καὶ m[p]ds ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα, βοηθὸν αὐτοῦ γ[εἸνέσθαι διὰ ἣν ἔχομε(ν) πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς φιλίαν, BGU I. 228(a.p. 114) (= «ϑελδείζογις, p. 74), which illustrate 1 Cor…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔχω (echō) — to have/be.

ἔχω,

__A2nd pers. singular ἔχεισθα conjecture in [Refs 7th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular subjunctive ἔχῃσθα [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect εἶχον, Epic dialect ἔχον [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect and poetry ἔχεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἕξω, Epic dialect infinitive ἑξέμεναι [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (of momentary action, especially in sense check, see below [Refs 4th c.BC+], not found in Attic dialect Inscrr. or [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular σχήσησθα [Refs]aorist 1 ἔσχης α falsa lectio in [Refs 3rd c.AD+]aorist 2 ἔσχον, imperative σχές [Refs 5th c.BC+] only in Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive σχῶ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural σχοίησαν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive σχεῖν [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect σχέμεν [Refs] (in Alexandr. Gr. 3rd.pers. plural imperfect and aorist 2 εἴχοσαν [NT+3rd c.BC+], see at {Σχέθω}: perfect ἔσχηκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔχω

echo

scheo skheh'-o; (used in certain tenses only)

a primary verb; to hold (used in very various applications, literally

or figuratively, direct or remote; such as possession; ability,

contiuity, relation, or condition):--be (able, X hold, possessed

with), accompany, + begin to amend, can(+ -not), X conceive, count,

diseased, do + eat, + enjoy, + fear, following, have, hold, keep, +

lack, + go to law, lie, + must needs, + of necessity, + need, next, +

recover, + reign, + rest, + return, X sick, take for, + tremble, +

uncircumcised, use.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔχω

v.

I have, hold, possess

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔχω echō 708x

pluperfect., ἐσχήκειν, to hold, Rev. 1:16; to seize, possess a person, Mk. 16:8; to have, possess, Mt. 7:29, et al. freq.; to have, have ready, be furnished with, Mt. 5:23; Jn. 5:36; 6:68; to have as a matter of crimination, Mt. 5:23; Mk. 11:25; to have at command, Mt. 27:65; to have the power, be able, Mt. 18:25; Lk. 14:14; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-APM — Verb · present · active · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-APM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
29%having
having29% · 211×has9% · 62×have8% · 58×you have7% · 52×i have5% · 36×we have5% · 35×he has3% · 24×had3% · 21×other renderings30% · 217×

716 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 97 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 709 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
Article the
ἄγγελοςan angel, messenαὐτόςκαίand, even, also,
μήNeg
Article theδέbut, on the otheπρόβατονa sheep
ὅς
καίand, even, also,ἐνεἰμίI am, exist
χρείαneed, necessity, bus
οὐNegαὐτόςὅς
ἔχωhaving709×
what comes after →
Article the
ἑπτάIndecυἱόςa son, descendenδέbut, on the othe
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegὅς
ἐν
Article theἑαυτοῦΧριστόςanointed, the Me
οὖςthe ear
ἀκούωI hear, listen
ἐξουσίαpower, authority, we
Article theἀλλάbut, exceptἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, p

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔχω · 709× in the New Testament
Revelation John Luke Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Acts Hebrews 1 John Romans 2 Corinthians 1 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 11c. AD 40

ἀπεριμάχητον δὲ δόγμα καὶ ἀνωφελὲς ἀναρχίαν ὡς ἐν πόλει κατασκευάζον τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ τὸν ἔφορον ἢ βραβευτὴν ἢ δικαστὴν οὐκ ἔχοντι, ὑφ’ οὗ πάντ’ οἰκονομεῖσθαι καὶ πρυτανεύεσθαι θέμις.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Gen. 1 20Pathyris110 BC

ἔτους η Μεχεὶρ β, ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῆι κάτω

P.Bad. 2 3Pathyris110 BC

Μεχεὶρ β ἐν Παθύρει ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῇ κάτω

P.Adl. 4Ptolemais (Oberägypten)110 BC

Ψεμμῖνις … ου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου χαίρειν. ὁμολογῶ ἔχειν παρὰ σοῦ χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα τρῖα ἄτοκα ?. ταῦτα δέ ἐστιν ἃ προσωφείλετό σοι

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
ποικίλαιςpoikilos various G4164 Adjective · dative · plural · feminine
10× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Something that is various or diverse has many different parts or characteristics. In the Bible, this word is used to describe the many kinds of people and experiences that Christians face, as seen in Matthew 4:24 and 1 Peter 1:6. It highlights the complexity of life.
Amplified meaning
divers, different
Tyndale gloss
various
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ποικίλος is an adjective meaning 'many-coloured' or 'variegated.' It conveys a sense of diversity, complexity, or manifold characteristics, appearing in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 4:24 and Hebrews 13:9. The term can refer to physical attributes, like colors, or metaphorically to ideas and experiences.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ποικίλος, -η, -ον,

[in LXX for נָקֹד, רִקְמָה, etc.;]

many-coloured, variegated. Metaph., various, manifold: Mt 4:24, Mk 1:34, Lk 4:40, II Ti 3:6, Tit 3:3, He 2:4 13:9, Ja 1:2, I Pe 1:6 4:10.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ποικίλος, -7, -ov, fr. Hom. down, various i. 6. 8: of divers colors, variegated: Sept. Ὁ. i. q. of divers sorts: Mt. iv. 24; Mk. i. 34; Lk. iv. 40; 2 Tim. iii. 6; Tit. iii. 3; Heb. ii. 4; xiii. 9; Jas.i. 2; 1 Pet.i. 6; iv. 10, [(A. V. in the last two exx. manifold) ].

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ποικίλος he will leave certain property to the temple—éJyra ὅ[σα] ἐποίησα ἐπ᾽ ὀνόματός σου εἶναι τοῦ [ἐν ᾿Αλεξανδρείᾳ θεοῦ] μεγ[ά]λου Σαράπιδος, ‘all that I placed in your name is the property of the great Serapis at Alexandria.’” In records of manumission, it is frequently stated that an enfranchised slave is free ποιεῖν ὅ ka θέλῃ, ‘Sto do whatever he wills”: see Deissmann (LAZ p. 328f.), who compares Gal 57. For the forms ποῖσαι Lk 118, ποίσας Jn 514 W, see Moulton G7». ii. p. 73, and cf. Archiv iv. p. 492. ΠεποιήKeay, as in Mk 157, is found in J/agz 93(b)*4 (a Senate decree—c. B.C. 190).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ποικίλος (poikilos) — various.

ποικίλος [ῐ], η, ον,

many-coloured, spotted, pied, dappled, παρδαλέη [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δράκων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴυγξ[Refs 5th c.BC+]; also of cattle, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; -ώτερον ταὧ [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; opposed to ὁμόχρους, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λίθος Αἰθιοπικὸς π., of the red granite of Syene, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; σφαῖρα [Refs 5th c.BC+], tattooed.

II. wrought in various colours, of woven or embroidered stuffs, in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν ποικίλοις.. κάλλεσιν βαίνειν, of a rich carpet, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; π., τό, a broidered robe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of Cyprian, Carthaginian, and Sicilian stuffs, [Refs 5th c.BC+]. adverb -λως, ὑφασμένον [LXX+4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ποικίλος

poikilos

of uncertain derivation; motley, i.e. various in character:--divers,

manifold.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ποικίλος, η, ον

Adj

various, of different colors

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ποικίλος poikilos 10x

of various colors, variegated, checkered; various, diverse, manifold, Mt. 4:24

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ποικίλος ποι^κίλος, η, ον many-coloured, spotted, mottled, pied, dappled, of leopards, fawns, Hom., etc.

of robes, wrought in various colours, broidered, Il., etc.; ἐν ποικίλοις κάλλεσιν, of a rich carpet, Aesch.; so, τὰ ποικίλα id. Aesch.

of metal work, τεύχεα π. χαλκῷ in-wrought with brass, Il., etc.: but, π. δεσμός intricate, Od.

ἡ στοὰ ἡ ποικίλη, the Poecile or great hall at Athens adorned with paintings of the battle of Marathon by Polygnotus, Aeschin., etc.

metaph. changeful, various, diversified, manifold, Aesch., Plat.;— π. μῆνες the changing months, Pind.

of Art, π. ὕμνος a song of changeful strain or full of diverse art, id. Pind.; so, ποικίλον κιθαρίζων id. Pind.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-DPF — Adjective · dative · plural · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-DPF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
90%various
various90% · 9×manifold10% · 1×

10 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial80%object10%subject10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 10 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
κακῶςbadly, evilly
νόσοςa disease, malady
ἀσθενέωI am weak, sick
ἐπιθυμίαdesire, eagerness fo
ἄγωI lead
ἡδονήpleasure, lust, stro
καίand, even, also,
καίand, even, also, nam
τέραςa wonder, porten
ποικίλοςvarious10×
what comes after →
νόσοςa disease, malady
καίand, even, also,
ἄγωI lead
αὐτός
ἐν
κακίαevil, wickedness
δύναμιςmight, power, marvel
καίand, even, also,
καίand, even, also, nam
ξένοςnew, novel, a fo

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceποικίλος · 10× in the New Testament
1 Peter Hebrews 2 Timothy James Luke Matthew Mark Titus
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 17 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.61c. AD 40

ἴδιον γὰρ αἰσθήσεως μὲν τὸ διδόναι, ἡδονῆς δὲ τῆς ποικίλης καὶ ὀφιώδους τὸ ἀπατᾶν καὶ παρακρούεσθαι·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.304c. AD 75–95

Τοῦ δὲ Φαραώθου μηδʼ οὕτως εἴκοντος τοῖς τοῦ θεοῦ βουλήμασιν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μὲν γυναῖκας συναπαίρειν τοῖς ἀνδράσιν ἀξιοῦντος καταλείπεσθαι δὲ τοὺς παῖδας, οὐκ ἠπόρει τὸ θεῖον τὴν πονηρίαν αὐτοῦ ποικίλοις κακοῖς καὶ μείζοσι τῶν προενδεδημηκότων…

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 23.3.3c. AD 140

παραλαμβάνει οὖν τοὺς ἀποπλανωμένους ἀπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ πορευθέντας ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις καὶ ἀπάταις τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου καὶ τιμωρεῖ αὐτούς, καθὼς ἄξιοί εἰσι, δειναῖς καὶ ποικίλαις τιμωρίαις.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59445Alexandria (?)276 BC–227 BC

τῶν ἐν τοῖς Διοτίμου. τῆς προστάδος … τω ἵνα γραφῆι κυμάτιον περιπόρφυρον καὶ θρᾶνος ποικίλος καὶ θωρακεῖον ὀροβοειδὲς καὶ τὸ ὑποστύλιον φλεβοπεριμέτριον, ἐμαυτῶι πάντα παρέχων, δραχμῶν λ, καὶ τοῦ

P.Köln 4 186201 BC–102 BC

καὶ διὰ τὸ ἀνιᾶσθαι ὑπὸ τοῦ κατὰ νώτου ἐφορμοῦντος στόλου τῶν Πηλουσι … … ποικίλοις καὶ παντοδαποῖς καιροῖς περιτυχόντες εἰς τοὺς ἐσχάτους … καθάπερ δὲ … εν εὐχόμενοι μετὰ

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
νόσοιςnosos diseases G3554 Noun · dative · plural · feminine
11× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
An illness or malady, such as those healed by Jesus in Matthew 4:23-24 and Mark 1:34.
Amplified meaning
sicknesses, maladies
Tyndale gloss
illness
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

νόσος (nósos) refers to disease or sickness, encompassing physical ailments and, in some contexts, moral or mental disorders. It appears frequently in the New Testament, notably in passages like Matthew 4:23 and Mark 1:34. The term also has broader meanings, including distress and suffering, as noted in classical literature.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

νόσος, -ου, ὁ,

[in LXX for חֳלִי, etc.;]

disease, sickness: Mt 4:23, 24 8:17(Aq.) 9:35 10:1, Mk 1:34, Lk 4:40 6:17 7:21 9:1, Ac 19:12.†

SYN.: v.s. ἀσθένεια.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

νόσος, -ov, 9, disease, sickness: Mt. iv. 23 sq.; viii. 17; ix. 35; x.1; Mk. i. 34; iii, 15 [RGL]; Lk. iv. 40; vi. 18 (17); vii. 21; ix.1; Acts xix.12. (Deut. vii. 15; xxviii. 59; Ex. xv. 26, ete. [Hom., Hadt., al.])

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

νόσος (nosos) — illness.

νόσος,

Epic dialect and Ionic dialect (not Doric dialect,[Refs] νοῦσος, ἡ, sickness, disease, plague, νοῦσον ἀνὰ στρατὸν ὦρσε κακήν (i.e. Apollo), ὀλέκοντο δὲ λαοί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κάμνειν νόσον, ὑπὸ νόσου, see at {κάμν; ἀσθενεῖν ταύτην τὴν νόσον} [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θήλεα ν.[Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. generally, distress, anguish, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II.2. disease of mind, especially caused by madness, passion, vice, etc., ν. φρενῶν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; θεία ν., i.e. madness, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of love, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ν. καὶ στάσιν οὐ ταὐτὸν νενόμικα; [Refs]

II.3. plague, bane, mischief, e.g. a whirlwind is θεία ν. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the trident of Poseidon, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; πεντεσύριγγος ν.…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

νόσος

nosos

of uncertain affinity; a malady (rarely figuratively, of moral

disability):--disease, infirmity, sickness.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

νόσος, ου, ἡ

n.f.

a disease, malady

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

νόσος nosos 11x

a disease, sickness, distemper, Mt. 4:23, 24; 8:17; 9:35

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

νόσος νόσος, ionic νοῦσος, ἡ, sickness, disease, malady, Hom., etc.

generally, distress, misery, suffering, sorrow, evil, Hes., Trag.

disease of mind, Trag.; θεία ν., i. e. madness, Soph.

of states, disorder, sedition, Plat.

a plague, bane, of a whirlwind, Soph.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DPF — Noun · dative · plural · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DPF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Smith's Bible Dictionary

[MEDICINE]

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Were introduced into the world by sin, and have been greatly increased by the prevalence of corrupt, indolent, and luxurious habits. Besides the natural causes of diseases, evil spirits were charged with producing them among the Hebrews, Job 2:7 Mr 9:17 Lu 13:16 2Co 12:7. The pious Jews recognized the hand of God in sending them, Ps 39:9-11 90:3-12; and in many cases special diseases were sent in punishment of particular sins, as Abimelech, Gehazi, Jehoram, Uzziah, Miriam, Herod, the Philistines, etc., and those who partook of the Lord’s supper unworthily, 1Co 11:30.…

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- Often sent as punishment

De 28:21; Joh 5:14

- Often brought from other countries

De 7:15

- Often through Satan

1Sa 16:14-16; Job 2:7

- Regarded as visitations

Job 2:7-10; Ps 38:2,7

- Intemperance a cause of

Ho 7:5

- Sins of youth a cause of

Job 20:11

- Over-excitement a cause of

Da 8:27

- Were many and divers

Mt 4:24

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
73%diseases
diseases73% · 8×disease27% · 3×

11 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object46%adverbial46%subject9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 11 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
θεραπεύωI care for, atte
Article the
καίand, even, also,ἀπόαὐτός
ποικίλοςvarious, of differen
ἔχωI have, hold, po
ἀσθενέωI am weak, sick
ἔχωI have, hold, po
ἀπό
πολύςmuch, many, ofte
νόσοςdiseases11×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
πᾶςall, the whole, βάσανοςtorture, tormentδαιμόνιονan evil-spirit,
βαστάζωI carry, carry away,
ποικίλοςvarious, of differen
ἄγωI lead
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,
θεραπεύωI care for, attend,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceνόσος · 11× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke Acts Mark
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 7 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.13c. AD 40

ἔν γε μὴν ταῖς νόσοις κριτικωτάτη ἑβδομάς.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.45c. AD 75–95

Δημοτελοῦς οὖν ἑορτῆς ἐπιστάσης, καθʼ ἣν εἰς τὴν πανήγυριν καὶ γυναιξὶ φοιτᾶν νόμιμον ἦν, σκήπτεται νόσον πρὸς τὸν ἄνδρα θηρωμένη μόνωσιν καὶ σχολὴν εἰς τὸ δεηθῆναι τοῦ Ἰωσήπου, καὶ γενομένης αὐτῇ ταύτης λιπαρεστέρους ἔτι τῶν πρώτων αὐτῷ…

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 7.1.3c. AD 110

τοῖς κατ̓ ἄνδρα κατὰ ὁμοήθειαν θεοῦ λάλει: πάντων τὰς νόσους βάσταζε ὡς τέλειος ἀθλητής.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. AD 5th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Mich. 11 616OxyrhynchosAD 181–AD 183

ἐγγράψας ἀνέτεινα τῷ Νεμεσιανῷ ὅπως ταῦτα διαπέμψηται τῷ ἐπιτρόπῳ, αὐτὸς τότε οὐ δυνάμενος διὰ νόσον καταπλεῦσαι. ἅπερ καὶ σοὶ νῦν τῷ κυρίῳ ὑποδείκνυμι, ἀποδεικνύς σοι τὰς ἡμέρας ἃς μόνας

P.Stras. 1 73AD 201–AD 300

καὶ τὰ τέκνα αὐτῆς, καὶ ὁ μικρὸς Μῖμος ἐτελεύτησεν, καὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸς μετὰ τὴν νόσον γίνομαι κατὰ τοῦ ποδός μου ἐρυσίπελαν καὶ μέχρι δεῦρο οὔπω κομψῶς ἔσχον, ἀλλὰ ἐχόμενα

PSI 6 696Arsinoites (?)AD 201–AD 300

ὁμογνήσιον ἀδελφόν, τῇ δὲ πείρᾳ μηδὲ πώποτε … η καὶ ἐν ταῖς καταλαβούσαις με νόσοις ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ Εὐεργέτιδι ἐν τοῖς ν … … τὸ αἱροῦν καὶ ἐπιβάλλον μοι

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
βασάνοιςbasanos by pains G931 Noun · dative · plural · feminine
3× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Torment can also refer to a state of suffering or anguish, as seen in Matthew 4:24, where Jesus heals those tormented by demons.
Amplified meaning
severe anguish
Tyndale gloss
torment
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word βάσανος (*basanos*) originally means 'touchstone,' a dark stone used for testing metals. It also extends to meanings related to torture and torment, particularly in the context of extracting truth or enduring severe pain. In the New Testament, it appears in references to both physical suffering and the torments of the afterlife.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

βάσανος, -ου, ὁ (of Oriental origin),

[in LXX chiefly for כְּלִמָּה ,אָשָׁם, and freq. in IV Mac ;]

prop., touchstone, a dark stone used in testing metals.

examination by torture.

torment, torture: Mt 4:24, Lk 15:23, 28.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

βάσανος, -ov, 7, [Curtius p. 439]; a. the touchstone, [ealled also basanite, Lat. lapis Lydius], by which gold and other metals are tested. b. the rack or instrument of torture by which one is forced to divulge the truth. c. torture, torment, acute pains : used of the pains of disease, Mt. iv. 24; of the torments of the wicked after death, ἐν βασάνοις ὑπάρχειν, Lk. xvi. 23 (Sap. iii. 1; 4 Mace. xiii. 14); hence 6 τόπος τῆς βασάνου is used of Gehenna, Lk. xvi. 28. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Theogn.], Pind. down.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

βάσανος. The original sense of ‘‘ touchstone,” ‘* test,” appears in P Oxy I. 58” (a.p. 288), where provision is made that only such persons are appointed to certain offices as are in a position to stand the test—ot καὶ βασάνοις ὑποκείσονται. In P Leid Wv8-%6f (ii/iii A.p.) λέγε: KAOte μοι, 6 χρηστὸς ἐν βαζάνοις, βοήθησον ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐλεήμων ἐν ὥραις βιαίος (1.6. -αις), πολοὶ (2. ¢. -ὺ) δυνάμενος ἐν κόσμῳ, ὁ κτίσας τὴν ἀναγκὴ (καὶ) τιμωρίαν, καὶ τὴν βάσανον, Leemans renders exploratio. the palace of the satrap Saitaphernes. For the derived sense, reference may be made |

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

βάσανος (basanos) — torment.

βᾰσᾰν-ος, ἡ,

touchstone, on which pure gold leaves a yellow streak, ἐς βάσανον δ᾽ ἐλθὼν παρατρίβομαι ὥστε μολύβδῳ χρυσός [Refs 6th c.BC+]

II. the use of this as a test, χρυσὸς ἐν β. πρέπει [Refs 5th c.BC+]: generally, test, trial of genuineness, οὐκ ἔστιν μείζων β. χρόνου [[Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰς β. εἶ χερῶν wilt come to a trial of strength, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [νόσου] ἔσχ᾽ ἐπὶ σοὶ βάσανον had experienced it in you, i. e. you had had it first, [Refs]; βάσανον ὑποκείσονται will be subjected to a test, of candidates, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

III. inquiry by torture, ἐς πᾶσαν β. ἀπικνέεσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially at Athens, used to extort evidence from slaves, εἰς β. δέχεσθαι [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

βάσανος

basanos

perhaps remotely from the same as 939 (through the notion of going to

the bottom); a touch-stone, i.e. (by analogy) torture:--torment.

see GREEK for 939

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

βάσανος, ου, ἡ

n.f.

torture, torment

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

βάσανος basanos 3x

pr. lapis Lydius, a species of stone from Lydia, which being applied to metals was thought to indicate any alloy which might be mixed with them, and therefore used in the trial of metals; hence, examination of a person, especially by torture; in NT torture, torment, severe pain, Mt. 4:24; Lk. 16:23, 28*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

βάσανος deriv. uncertain the touch-stone, Lat. lapis Lydius, a dark-coloured stone on which pure gold, when rubbed, leaves a peculiar mark, Theogn.: hence.

generally, a test, trial whether a thing be genuine or real, Hdt., Soph.

inquiry by torture, the "question, " torture, used to extort evidence from slaves, Oratt.

torture of disease, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DPF — Noun · dative · plural · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DPF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
67%torment
torment67% · 2×pains33% · 1×

3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
νόσοςa disease, malad
ἐν
ὑπάρχωI am, exist, am
Article the
οὗτος
βάσανοςby pains
what comes after →
συνέχωI press together, co
δαιμονίζομαιI am demon-posse
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
ἈβραάμProp

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceβάσανος · 3× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 8 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn Abraham 104c. AD 40

ὅπερ κατιδὼν ὁ ἔφορος — μόνῳ γὰρ ἔξεστι θεῷ ψυχὴν ἰδεῖν — ἐμίσησε καὶ προὐβάλετο καὶ βασάνοις ἤλεγξεν ἀργαλεωτάταις ἦθος κατεψευσμένον.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 6.37c. AD 75–95

ὑπὸ δὲ φροντίδος καὶ βασάνου τῆς ἐπὶ τοῖς εἰρημένοις οὔτε τροφῆς ἐμνημόνευσεν οὔτε ὕπνου, διʼ ὅλης δὲ τῆς νυκτὸς στρέφων τὰς περὶ τῶν πραγμάτων ἐννοίας διεκαρτέρει.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 6.1c. AD 96

Τούτοις τοῖς ἀνδράσιν ὁσίως πολιτευσαμένοις συνηθροίσθη πολὺ πλῆθος ἐκλεκτῶν, οἵτινες πολλαῖς αἰκίαις καὶ βασάνοις διὰ ζῆλος παθόντες ὑπόδειγμα κάλλιστον ἐγένοντο ἐν ἡμῖν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 1st c. AD undated
ZPE 47 (1982), p. 237-238 no. 1440Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 5

λόγῳ οἱ παρὰ Τρύφωνος τοῦ στρατηγοῦ τοῦ Ἀρσινοίτου σεισμοῦ χάριν συνηνήγκασάν με μετὰ μεγίστης βασάνου κατὰ συνοχὴν ποιήσαντες τῷ Χοιὰχ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος ἔτους προέσθαι χειρογραφίαν ὑπὲρ τοῦ κατασπεῖραι περὶ

με παρατυχεῖν, φησίν ἐβασανίσθη. τοῦτο δὲ πῶς σεαυτῷ ἐπέτραψας; ἀπεκρίνατο, ἐὰν θορυβηθῇ, , τοῦτο βάσανός ἐστιν. Λαῖτος εἶπεν, … ἐὰν θορυβηθῇ ἀναιτίους πέμπεις καὶ ἐπʼ αὐτοφώρῳ εἰλημμένους ἀπολύεις

P.Oxy. 1 58OxyrhynchosAD 288

προσηκούσης ἐπιμελείας τεύξονται. δηλαδὴ δὲ τοιούτους αἱρεθῆναι ποιήσετε τοὺς τοῖς φροντισταῖς ὑπηρετησομένους οἳ καὶ βασάνοις ὑποκείσονται. ἔρρωσθε . ἔτους ε καὶ δ , Θὼθ ιϛ.

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
συνεχομένους,sunechō oppressing, G4912 Verb · present · passive · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
12× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To hold or oppress someone, like keeping them in a tight spot, as in Luke 8:45 and 19:43. It can also mean to constrain or press someone, making them feel trapped. This word is about being in a difficult situation.
Amplified meaning
tormented, troubled
Tyndale gloss
to hold/oppress
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

συνέχω (sunecho) means to hold together or confine, and it can refer to physical restraint, such as closing ears (Acts 7:57), or to emotional or mental pressure, as in being compelled or afflicted. The word is built from the prefix συν- (together) and the root ἔχω (to have). It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, including instances of being seized by illness (Matthew 4:24) and the emotional state of being pressed by circumstances (Philippians 1:23).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

συν-έχω

[in LXX for עצר, חבר, etc. ;]

to hold together (τ. συνέχον τ. πάντα, Wi 1:7): of closing the ears, Ac 7:57 (τ. στόμα, Is 52:15); to hem in, press on every side: Lk 8:45 19:43.

to hold fast;

of a prisoner, to hold in charge (Luc.; cf. exx. in Deiss., BS, 160; MM, xxiv): Lk 22:63;

to constrain: II Co 5:14; pass., Lk 12:50, Ac 18:5 (τ. λόγῳ; cf. Field, Notes, 128), Phl 1:23; in pass., of ills, to be seized or afflicted by, suffering from:

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

συνέχω. (1) For the literal meaning of this word ‘‘hold together,” “keep together,” cf. P Cairo Zen II. 591555 (B.c. 256) μὴ πλείους δὲ πέντε ἡμερῶν σύσχηις TO ὕδωρ, with reference to not keeping a piece of land flooded for more than five days; P Tebt 11. 4ro™ (a.p. 16) ἐρωτῶ σε ταχύτερον συσχεῖν τί] πρᾶγμα, “1 beg you to close the matter with all speed” (Edd.); and 74. 3907 (a.p. 167) ᾿Οννῶφρις συν[έχ]ω τὰς δραχμὰς ἐγατὸν εἴκοσι τέσσαρ[ας, “IT Onnophris have received the 124 drachmae,” in connexion with a loan on mortgage. (2) With the usage of the verb in Lk 228 of the officers who held Jesus zz charge Deissmann (8S p. 160) compares P Petr II. 201-10 (B.c. 252) where in an official minute we read of certain sailors who went to Herakleopolis, καὶ συν[έϊσχεν αὐτοὺς Ἡρακλείδης ὃ ἀρχιφυλακίτης, “and Herakleides, the chief of the police, arrested them.” Add for the same sense P Magd 427…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

συνέχω (sunechō) — to hold/oppress.

συνέχω,

aorist συνέσχον:—middle, future συνέξομαι in passive sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, aorist συνεσχέθην [Refs 4th c.BC+]: future infinitive συσχεθήσεσθαι [Refs 1st c.BC+] W.:—hold or keep together, confine, secure, ὅθι ζωστῆρος ὀχῆες χρύσειοι σύνεχον [θώρηκα] [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἵνα τε ξυνέχουσι τένοντες ἀγκῶνος where the sinews of the elbow hold [it] together, [Refs]meet, see below [Refs]; Ὠκεανός.. συνεῖχε σάκος enclosed, compassed it, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Αἴτνα σ. [Τυφῶνα] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὼ μηρὼ σ. hold them together, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν closed or stopped their ears, [NT]; μηδὲ συσχέτω ἐπ᾽ ἐμὲ φρέαρ τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ let not the pit close its mouth upon me, [LXX]; τὸ δέρμα σ. [τὰ ὀστᾶ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἄτλας ἅπαντα σ[LXX]passive, τὸ λεγόμενον ἐν φρέατι συσχόμενος” trapped in a well, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

συνέχω

sunecho

from 4862 and 2192; to hold together, i.e. to compress (the ears, with

a crowd or siege) or arrest (a prisoner); figuratively, to compel,

perplex, afflict, preoccupy:--constrain, hold, keep in, press, lie

sick of, stop, be in a strait, straiten, be taken with, throng.

see GREEK for 4862

see GREEK for 2192

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

συνέχω

v.

I press together, confine, compel, am afflicted with

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

συνέχω synechō 12x

pr. to hold together; to confine, shut up, close; τὰ ὦτα, to stop the ears, Acts 7:57; to confine, as a besieged city, Lk. 19:43; to hold, hold fast, have the custody of any one, Lk. 22:63; to hem in, urge, press upon, Lk. 8:45; to exercise a constraining influence on, 2 Cor. 5:14; pass. to be seized with, be affected with, as fear, disease, etc., Mt. 4:24; Lk. 4:38; 8:37; Acts 28:8; to be in a state of mental constriction, to be hard…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

συνέχω fut. ξω aor2 συνέσχον fut. mid. in pass. sense, Dem. to hold or keep together, Il.: to enclose, encompass, embrace, Hes., Plat.

to keep together, keep from dispersing, of soldiers, Xen., Dem.: —then, ς. πόλιν to keep the state together, keep it from falling to pieces, Eur.; καὶ θεοὺς καὶ ἀνθρώπους ἡ κοινωνία ξ. Plat.; ς. τὴν πολιτείαν Dem.; so, ξ.τὴν εἰρεσίαν to keep the rowers together, make them pull in time, Thuc.

to constrain or force one to a thing, NTest.

to compress, oppress, id. NTest.: Pass. to be constrained, oppressed, afflicted, Hdt., attic

intr. to meet, εἰς ἕν Arist.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PPP-APM — Verb · present · passive · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PPP-APM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
8%they held
they held8% · 1×occupied8% · 1×oppressed8% · 1×compels8% · 1×i am pressed8% · 1×oppressing8% · 1×oppressed with8% · 1×they were seized8% · 1×other renderings33% · 4×

12 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 12 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
μέγας
φόβοςfear, terror, reφωνήa sound, noise,
βάσανοςtorture, torment
καίand, even, also,
εἰμίI am, exist
ΣίμωνSimon
ὄχλοςa crowd
Article the
πῶς
καίand, even, also,
συνέχωoppressing,12×
what comes after →
αὐτός
δέbut, on the otheἐμπαίζωI mock
σύ
καίand, even, also,πάντοθενfrom all sides
Article the
οὖςthe earλόγοςa word, speech,
δαιμονίζομαιI am demon-possessed
καίand, even, also,
πυρετόςa fever
μέγας

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσυνέχω · 12× in the New Testament
Luke Acts 2 Corinthians Matthew Philippians
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 26 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaOn Husbandry 40c. AD 40

στοχάζονται δὲ οὐδὲν ἧττον καὶ τοῦ μὴ διασπασθεῖσαν αὐτὴν σποράδην διασκεδασθῆναι, φόβον ἐπανατεινόμενοι τὸν σωφρονιστὴν τῶν λόγῳ μηδέποτε πειθομένων καὶ κολάσει χρώμενοι συνεχεῖ, μετρίᾳ μὲν κατὰ τῶν ἰάσιμα νεωτεριζόντων, ἀφορήτῳ δὲ κατὰ τῶν ἀνίατα·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.3c. AD 75–95

καὶ αὐτόθι τεταλαιπωρημένοι τῷ τε συνεχεῖ τῆς ὁδοιπορίας καὶ τῇ τῆς τροφῆς ἀπορίᾳ, καὶ γὰρ τότʼ αὐτοὺς τελείως ἐπιλελοίπει, κατάγονται·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Heid. 4 298Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 104

κατακεχώρισται ἔτους η Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Νέρουα Τραιανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Δακικοῦ Χοιὰκ ιζ Φᾶσις λαογράφος συνέσχον … … … … vestiges Σισόις vestiges vestiges

P. Münch. 3 96Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 158

ἐν μηνὶ Παῦνι τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος ἔτους καθὼς πρόκιται. Σαραπίων ἔγραψα τὰ πλεῖστα. Ἰσχυρίων Ἡρώδου συνέσχον καὶ συναποδώσω τὰς δραχμὰς τὰς ἑκατὸν ὀκτὼ καθὼς πρόκειται.

P.Tebt. 2 390Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 167

τὴν ἄρουραν μίαν ἥμισυ ἀντὶ τόκου, πρὸς ἡμᾶς ὄντων τῶν δημοσίων καθὼς πρόκειται. Ὀννῶφρις συνέχω τὰς δραχμὰς ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι τέσ-Xσαρας καὶ συναποδώσω καθὼς πρόκιται. Σαραπάμμων συνέχω τὰς δραχμὰς ἑκατὸν

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
δαιμονιζομένουςdaimonizomai those being demonised G1139 Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
13× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To be demonised means to be under the power of an evil spirit, as seen in Matthew 4:24 and Mark 1:32. It involves being possessed or controlled by a demon. This concept is often described using the participle form of the word.
Amplified meaning
under evil spirits' control
Tyndale gloss
be demonised
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word δαιμονίζομαι (i.e., *daimonizomai*) means to be possessed or afflicted by a demon or evil spirit. It is derived from δαίμων (i.e., *daimon*), and is used in the New Testament to describe individuals suffering from severe physical or mental ailments believed to be caused by demons. The term appears in various contexts, indicating a range of afflictions attributed to demonic possession.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

** δαιμονίζομαι

(in cl. also δαιμονάω; < δαίμων),

[in Aq.: Ps 90(91):6 * ;]

to be under the power of a δαίμων (δαιμόνιον, q.v.), to be possessed: Mt 15:22; elsewhere always ptcp., -ιζόμενος, -ισθείς: Mt 4:24; 8:16, 28, 33 9:32 12:22, Mk 1:32 5:15, 16, 18, Lk 8:36, Jo 10:21 (Cremer, 171).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δαιμονίζομαι; 1 aor. pass. ptep. δαιμονισθείς ; (Saluwv) ; to be under the power of a demon: ἄλλος κατ᾽ ἄλλην δαιμονίζεται τύχην, Philem. in Stob. ecl. phys. 1 p. 196; of the insane, Plut. symp. 7, 5, 4, and in other later auth. In the N. T. δαιμονιζόμενοι are persons afflicted with especially severe diseases, either bodily or mental (such as paralysis, blindness, deafness, loss of speech, epilepsy, ' melancholy, insanity, ete.), whose bodies in the opinion of the Jews demons (see δαιμόνιον) had entered, and so held possession of them as not only to afflict them with ills, but also to dethrone the reason and take its place themselves; accordingly the possessed were wont to express the mind and consciousness of the demons dwelling in them; and their cure was thought to require the expulsion of the demon — [but on this subject see B.D. Am. ed. s. ν. Demoniacs and reff. there; Weiss, Leben…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δαιμονίζομαι in its NT sense of being possessed with demons seems to occur only in later Greek. For a form δαιμονιάζω, otherwise unknown, see the Paris Great Magical Papyrus, Leaf | | accession of Nero, P Oxy VII. ro21° (Δ... 54) the Emperor 33°07 (c. A.D. 300) πρὸς δαιμονιαζομένους ΙΤιβήχεως δόκιμον, “for those possessed by demons, an approved charm by Pibechis” (cited by Deissmann ZAZ, p. 251). The normal form occurs in P Leid WY:® (ii/iii a.p.) ἐν (Δ ἐὰν) δαιμονιfopev(w) εἴπῃς Td (ὄνομα), προσάγων τῇ pewl αὐτοῦ θεῖον καὶ ἄσφαλτον, εὐθέως λαλήσει (sc. τὸ δαιμόνιον) κ(αὶ) ἀπελεύσεται. In MGr the act. δαιμονίζω appears, = “" drive mad”: cf. Abbott Songs, p. 224 (no. 47). The derived noun δαιμονισμός occurs in Vettius Valens, [By…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δαιμονίζομαι (daimonizomai) — be demonised.

δαιμον-ίζομαι,

middle, ={δαιμονάω}, ἄλλος κατ᾽ ἄλλην δαιμονίζεται τύχην each one hath his own fate appointed, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. as passive, to be deified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; active in [Refs 5th c.AD+]

III. to be possessed by a demon or evil spirit, [NT+1st c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δαιμονίζομαι

daimonizomai

middle voice from 1142; to be exercised by a dæmon:--have a (be vexed

with, be possessed with) devil(-s).

see GREEK for 1142

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δαιμονίζομαι

v.

I am demon-possessed

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δαιμονίζομαι daimonizomai 13x

in NT to be possessed, afflicted, vexed, by a demon or evil spirit, i.q. δαιμόνιον ἔχειν, Mt. 4:24; 8:16, 28, 33

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δαιμονίζομαι Mid. to be possessed by a demon or evil spirit, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PNP-APM — Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PNP-APM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
54%being demonised
being demonised54% · 7×demonised15% · 2×having been demonised15% · 2×those being demonised8% · 1×one demonised8% · 1×other renderings0% · 0×

13 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb54%object23%subject15%predicate8%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 13 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
Article theκαίand, even, also,θεωρέωI behold, look a
αὐτός
προσφέρωI bring to, offe
συνέχωI press together, co
βάσανοςtorture, torment
δύο
αὐτός
κωφόςdumb, deaf
αὐτός
δαιμονίζομαιthose being demonised13×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
σεληνιάζομαιI am a lunaticπερί
πολύςmuch, many, often
καίand, even, also,
ἐκ
Article the
τυφλόςblind
καίand, even, also,
κάθημαιI sit, am seated
ἱματίζωI clothe

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδαιμονίζομαι · 13× in the New Testament
Matthew Mark John Luke
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 8.47c. AD 75–95

προσφέρων ταῖς ῥισὶ τοῦ δαιμονιζομένου τὸν δακτύλιον ἔχοντα ὑπὸ τῇ σφραγῖδι ῥίζαν ἐξ ὧν ὑπέδειξε Σολόμων ἔπειτα ἐξεῖλκεν ὀσφρομένῳ διὰ τῶν μυκτήρων τὸ δαιμόνιον, καὶ πεσόντος εὐθὺς τἀνθρώπου μηκέτʼ εἰς αὐτὸν ἐπανήξειν ὥρκου, Σολόμωνός τε μεμνημένος…

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
σεληνιαζομένουςselēniazomai those being epileptic G4583 Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to be epileptic or have seizures, as seen in Matthew 4:24 and 17:15. It was believed that the moon's cycles influenced epilepsy. People with epilepsy were sometimes called moonstruck.
Amplified meaning
experiencing, epileptic fits
Tyndale gloss
be epileptic
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word σεληνιάζομαι (*seleniazomai*) means to be moonstruck or epileptic, stemming from σελήνη (*selēnē*), meaning moon. It is used in the New Testament to describe those affected by epilepsy, with references in Matthew 4:24 and 17:15. The lexicons consistently link this condition to lunar phases, indicating a belief in the moon's influence on health.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

*† σεληνιάζω

(< σελήνη),

act, in Manetho (Carm., 4, 81), in NT depon. -ομαι,

to be moonstruck, i.e. epileptic (epilepsy being supposed to be influenced by the moon): Mt 4:24 17:15.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σεληνιάζομαι ; (σελήνη) ; [lit to be moon-struck (cf. lunatic); see Wetstein on Mt. iv. 24; Suicer, Thesaur. ii. 945 sq.; BB. DD. 8. v. Lunatic]; to be epileptic (epilepsy being supposed to return and increase with the increase of the moon): Mt. iv. 24; xvii.15. (Manetho carm. 4, 81 and 217; [Lcian., al.]; eccles. writ.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

σεληνιάζομαι ἔσται σισμός (‘‘terrae motus,” Ed.). The word is used metaphorically in Preisigke 56751 (B.c. 184-3) τοὺ]ς δὲ διαφορᾶς ἢ σεισμοῦ χάριν καταπέϊμπετε] πρὸς ἡμᾶς παρᾳχρῆμα, and P Par 1557 (B.c. 120) ὁμολογουμένως δ᾽ ἐπὶ συκοφαντείᾳ καὶ σεισμῷ ἐπαγειοχόϊτος.. .] ἔγκλημα : cf. σεῖσμα in Ρ Tebt I. 415 (c. B.c. 110) εἰσπραχθέντος τὰ σείσματα, ‘being made to refund his extortions” (Edd.). See also s.7. διασείω.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σεληνιάζομαι (selēniazomai) — be epileptic.

σελην-ιάζομαι,

passive, to be moonstruck, i.e. epileptic, [NT+2nd c.AD+]

2. to be sublunar, i.e. subject to change and decay, -ομένης τῆς φύσεως[Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σεληνιάζομαι

seleniazomai

middle voice or passive from a presumed derivative of 4582; to be

moon-struck, i.e. crazy:--be a lunatic.

see GREEK for 4582

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σεληνιάζομαι

v.

I am a lunatic

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σεληνιάζομαι selēniazomai 2x

to be a lunatic, Mt. 4:24; 17:15*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

σεληνιάζομαι from σελήνη σεληνιάζομαι, Dep. to be moonstruck, i. e. epileptic, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PNP-APM — Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PNP-APM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%those being epileptic
those being epileptic50% · 1×he is epileptic50% · 1×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
δαιμονίζομαιI am demon-posse
ὅτιthat, since, because
υἱόςa son, descenden
σεληνιάζομαιthose being epileptic
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
παραλυτικόςafflicted with pκακῶςbadly, evilly

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσεληνιάζομαι · 2× in the New Testament
Matthew
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
παραλυτικούς·paralutikos those paralytic; G3885 Adjective · accusative · plural · masculine
10× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
In the Bible, a paralytic is someone who is paralyzed, like the man in Matthew 4:24 and Mark 2:3-5. This condition made people unable to move or feel. Jesus healed many paralytics during his ministry.
Amplified meaning
unable to move, lame
Tyndale gloss
paralytic
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word παραλυτικός (i.e., *paralytikos*) means 'paralytic' and is derived from the verb παραλύω (to relax or dissolve). It describes someone afflicted with paralysis or weakness of limbs. This term appears in several New Testament passages, primarily referring to individuals suffering from paralysis. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meaning.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

*† παρα-λυτικός, -ή, -όν

(< παραλύω),

paralytic: Mt 4:24 8:6 9:2, 6, Mk 2:3-5, 9, 10, Lk 5:24 (Rec., WH, mg.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παρα-λυτικός, -7, -dv, (fr. παραλύω, 4: V-), paralytic, i. e. suffering from the relaxing of the nerves of one side; univ. disabled, weak of limb, [A. V. palsied, sick of the palsy]: Mt. iv. 24; viii. 6; ix. 2,6; Mk. ii. 3-5, 9; and L WH mrg. in Lk. v. 34. [Cf. Riehm, HWB. 8. v. Krankheiten, 5; B. ἢ. Am. ed. p. 1866>.]

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παραλυτικός. For this rare word ct. Vett. Val. pp. 110°, 12724. TlapaAvtos is found in Artem. p. 2447 ὁ ἐξ αὐτῆς γεννώμενος παράλυτος ἐγένετο, cf. 20.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παραλυτικός (paralutikos) — paralytic.

παρα-λῠτικός, ή, όν,

paralytic, [NT+1st c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

παραλυτικός

paralutikos

from a derivative of 3886; as if dissolved, i.e. "paralytic":--that

had (sick of) the palsy.

see GREEK for 3886

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παραλυτικός, ή, όν

Adj

afflicted with paralysis

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παραλυτικός paralytikos 10x

lame, palsied, used only as a noun in NT, paralytic, Mt. 4:24; 8:6; 9:2, 6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παραλυτικός from παράλυ^σις παραλυ^τικός, ή, όν paralytic, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-APM — Adjective · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-APM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
80%paralytic
paralytic80% · 8×those paralytic10% · 1×paralyzed10% · 1×

10 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
indirect object50%object30%adverbial10%subject10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 10 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
λέγωI say, speakὅπουwhere, whither
αὐτός
προσφέρωI bring to, offeπρός
καίand, even, also, nam
σεληνιάζομαιI am a lunatic
οἰκίαa house, household
Article the
παραλυτικόςthose paralytic;10×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
θεραπεύωI care for, atte
δεινῶςvehemently, terribly
βασανίζωI torment, tortu
ἐπί
κλίνηa couch, bed, ma
θαρσέωbe of good cheer
τέκνονa child, descend
ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, rais
αἴρωI raise, lift up

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαραλυτικός · 10× in the New Testament
Matthew Mark
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
ἐθεράπευσενtherapeuō He healed G2323 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
43× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To serve or heal, as in Matthew 12:10 and Mark 6:5, where Jesus cures people of diseases, showing God's power.
Amplified meaning
cured, restored to health
Tyndale gloss
to serve/heal
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

θεραπεύω (therapeuō) means to serve, attend to, or heal. It is used in both a medical context, referring to curing or treating diseases, and in a broader sense of serving or honoring others, including divine service. In the New Testament, it appears in various passages such as Matthew 4:23 and Acts 17:25. Some lexicons note its use in a worship context, while others emphasize its medical implications.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θεραπεύω,

[in LXX for ישׁב, etc.;]

to do service, serve: c. acc. pers., pass., Ac 17:25.

As medical term, to treat (MM, Exp., xv), cure, heal: Mt 12:10, Mk 6:5, Lk 6:7, al.; c. acc. pers., Mt 4:24, Mk 1:34, al.; seq. ἀπό, Lk 5:15 6:18 7:21 8:2, 43; θ. νόσον (μαλακίαν), Mt 4:23, al.

SYN.: ἰάομαι (v. Field, Notes, 60; MM, Exp., l.c.).

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θεραπεύω ; impf. ἐθεράπευον ; fut. θεραπεύσω ; 1 aor. ἐθεράπευσα; Pass., pres. θεραπεύομαι ; impf. ἐθεραπευόμην; pf. ptep. τεθεραπευμένος ; 1 aor. ἐθεραπεύθην ; (Oepay, i. 4. θεράπων) ; fr. Hom. down ; 1. to serve, do service: τινά, to one; pass. θεραπ. ὑπό τινος, Acts xvii. 25. 2: to heal, cure, restore to health: Mt. xii.10; Mk. vi.5; Lk. vi. 7; ix. 6; xiii. 14; xiv. 3; τινά, Mt. iv. 24; viii. 7, 16, ete.; Mk. i. 34; iii. 10; Lk. iv. 23; x. 9; pass., Jn. v. 10; Acts iv. 14; v.16, etc.; τινὰ aro Tivos, to cure one of any disease, Lk. vii. 21; pass., Lk. v.15; viii. 2; θεραπεύειν νόσους, μαλακίαν: Mt. iv. 23; ix. 35; x. 1; Mk. iii. 15 [R GL, Tr mrg. in br.]; Lk. ix. 1; a wound, pass., Rev. xiii. 3, 12.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θεραπεύω (therapeuō) — to serve/heal.

θερᾰπ-εύω,

later also θᾰρᾰπεύω (which see), future -εύσω[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, future -εύσομαι[Refs]: aorist ἐθεραπευσάμην [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—passive, future -ευθήσομαι[Refs]: future middle in passive sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐθεραπεύθην [Refs]:—to be an attendant, do service, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—middle, [Refs]

II. do service to the gods, ἀθανάτους, θεοὺς θ., [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Διόνυσον, Μούσας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θ. Φοίβου ναούς serve them, [Refs]: absolutely, worship, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; do service or honour to one's parents, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; serve, wait upon a master, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θ. τὰς θήκας reverence men's graves, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

θεραπεύω

therapeuo

from the same as 2324; to wait upon menially, i.e. (figuratively) to

adore (God), or (specially) to relieve (of disease):--cure, heal,

worship.

see GREEK for 2324

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θεραπεύω

v.

I care for, attend, serve, heal

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θεραπεύω therapeuō 43x

to heal, cure, Mt. 4:23, 24; 8:16; pass. to receive service, Acts 17:25; to serve, minister to, render service and attendance; to render divine service, worship, Acts 17:25

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θεραπεύω θεράπων to be an attendant, do service, Od.

to do service to the gods, Lat. colere deos, Hes., Hdt., attic:— to do service or honour to one's parents or masters, Eur., Plat.

to serve, court, pay court to, τινά Hdt., Ar., etc.; and in bad sense, to flatter, wheedle, Thuc.: to conciliate, id. Thuc.; τὸ θεραπεῦον ῀ οἱ θεραπεύοντες, id. Thuc.

of things, to consult, attend to, Lat. inservire, id. Thuc.; ἡδονὴν θερ. to indulge one's love of pleasure, Xen.; τὰς θύρας τινὸς θερ. to wait at a great man's door, id. Xen.

to take care of, provide for men, of the gods, id. Xen.

of things, to attend to, provide for, Soph., Thuc., etc.

θερ. τὸ σῶμα to take care of one's person, Lat. cutem curare, Plat.

to treat medically, to heal, cure, Thuc., Xen.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%healed
healed25% · 11×he healed25% · 11×heal11% · 5×healing9% · 4×do heal7% · 3×be healed5% · 2×he served2% · 1×will heal2% · 1×other renderings14% · 6×

44 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 14 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 43 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςβασιλείαkingship, sovereπολύςmuch, many, ofte
σάββατονthe Sabbath, a week
Article the
ἔρχομαιI come, go
ἐγώοὖνtherefore, then
αὐτός
δύναμαιI am powerful, aθάνατοςdeath
Article the
ἸουδαῖοςJewishἵστημιI cause to stand
θεραπεύωHe healed43×
what comes after →
αὐτός
πᾶςall, the whole, ὥστεso that, therefoἐκεῖthere, yonder, t
Article the
ἄρρωστοςinfirm, sick, ilπαῖςa boy or girl chἐν
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
νόσοςa disease, malad
ἵναin order that, so th
κατηγορέωI accuse, chargeεὑρίσκωI find
πολύςmuch, many, often
κακῶςbadly, evillyἀπό

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθεραπεύω · 43× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke Acts Mark Revelation John
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.87c. AD 40

κἀκεῖνος μὲν σωφροσύνῃ, χαλκῷ ὄφει, θεραπεύεται γενομένῃ ὑπὸ τοῦ σοφοῦ Μωυσέως, οὗτος δὲ ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ ποτίζεται κάλλιστον ποτὸν σοφίαν ἐκ τῆς πηγῆς, ἣν αὐτὸς ἐξήγαγεν ἀπὸ τῆς ἑαυτοῦ σοφίας.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.268c. AD 75–95

τοῦ κατὰ τὰς ὄψεις πάθους ἐμποδὼν ἦν αὐτῷ θεραπεύειν τὸν θεὸν ἐκέλευσεν ἐξελθεῖν ἐπὶ κυνηγέσιον καὶ θηρασάμενον ὅσα ἂν αὐτῷ δυνατὸν γίνηται παρασκευάσαι δεῖπνον, ἵνα μετὰ τοῦτο ἱκετεύσῃ τὸν θεὸν σύμμαχον αὐτῷ καὶ συνεργὸν εἰς ἅπαντα παρεῖναι τὸν…

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 7.2.1c. AD 110

οὐ πᾶν τραῦμα τῇ αὐτῇ ἐμπλάστρῳ θεραπεύεται.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC 7th c. AD 1st c. AD
PSI 7 857Arsinoites109 BC

θεραπείας Ζήνωνος τ … … … υ Ἁρμάιν καὶ ρε Σισούχου καὶ Στέφανον καὶ θεραπεύειν τοὺς τρεῖς , αὐτὸν δὲ μη … εια ἐρρ … , Φῶφι κθ.

P.Oslo 3 95OxyrhynchosAD 96

ἐπιδὼνοὖν ταύτην ἐπακολουθοῦντος τοῦ ὑπηρέτου εὗρον ἐπὶ τῷ μέσῳ δακτύλῳ τραῦμα , ὃ καὶ θεραπεύω, καὶ συνδρομὴν αἵματος ἐπὶ τῷ μαστῷ καὶ ἐξεμοῦσαν καὶ πυρέττουσαν. διὸ προσφωνῶ. ἔτους ιε

P.Giss. 1 20HermopolitesAD 113–AD 120

τῶν Διοσκούρων τῆς κτήσεως σου καὶ ᾠκοδόμηται αὐτῶν ὁ τόπος καὶ Ἄρειος ὁ κωλοπλάστης θεραπεύει αὐτοὺς καὶ ἔλεγεν ὅτι, ἐὰν Ἀπολλώνιός μοι γράψῃ περὶ αὐτῶν, θεραπεύσω προῖκα. ἀξιώσεις οὖν

And went out the news of Him into all <the> Syria; And they brought to Him all the sick having various diseases and by pains oppressing, and those being demonised and those being epileptic and those paralytic; and He healed them.
αὐτούς.autos them. G846 Personal pronoun · accusative · plural · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-APM — Personal pronoun · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-APM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςthem.5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate